Specifications
Indexed Terms: Electric
MINI Cooper SE Hardtop 2 Door Signature Plus Trim 2021 Questions and Answers
OWNER'S MANUAL.
MINI HARDTOP 2 DOOR / 4 DOOR / JCW GP.
Thank you for choosing a MINI.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle. the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to enhance operating reliability and road safety. and to contribute to maintaining the value of your MINI.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Navigation. Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
NOTES
Information 6
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering .16
Set-up and use ..20
On the road. 24
Cockpit 32
Central Information Display (CID) .36
Voice activation system. 44
General settings .48
Owner's Manual media .60
Opening and closing .. 62
Seats. mirrors. and steering wheel 82
Transporting children safely ..92
Driving 98
Displays ..122
Lights 144
Safety .150
Driving stability control systems 173
Driving comfort .. 178
Climate control .199
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Interior equipment 208
Storage compartments ..219
Cargo area .223
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving 230
Reducing fuel consumption .236
Refueling 244
Fuel .246
Wheels and tires .248
Engine compartment ..272
Engine oil ..275
Coolant .279
Maintenance ..281
Replacing components. 283
Breakdown assistance .. 292
Care .300
Technical data .. 306
Appendix 311
Everything from A to Z .312
+ 2020 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich. Germany Reprinting. including excerpts. only with the written consent of BMW AG. Munich.
US English ID5 II/20. 03 20 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper. bleached without chlorine. suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Information
Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation The fastest way to find information on a particular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is pro vided in the first chapter.
John Cooper Works GP The John Cooper Works GP is a special model of the MINI 3-door model with spe cial focus on a sporty character.
Special features: Specially designed lowered chassis and sport tires for a sporty driving style.
Specially designed driving mode for the vehicle: GP MODE.
Improved aerodynamics. for instance with front and rear spoilers.
Strut brace for stronger body rigidity and improved roadholding.
Limited slip differential for improved forward momentum.
Lightweight construction. for instance with CFRP wheel arch width extensions.
Some of the operation related features of the John Cooper Works GP differ from those of the MINI 3-door production model.
These deviations are described in the re spective chapters and marked as follows: John Cooper Works GP.
Deviations from the production vehicle: Omission of the second seat row and the drink holders in the rear.
Modified cargo area with cargo rod.
Omission of the cargo cover and the socket in the cargo area.
Modified position of the attachment point for securing a child seat.
GP MODE replaces DTC.
Omission of the Driving Mode switch.
Speed Limiter.
Standard sport tires.
Not approved for driving through a car wash.
Omission of the rear window wiper.
For an overview of all descriptions on the John Cooper Works GP. refer to the index under John Cooper Works GP.
Updates made after the editorial deadline Due to updates after the editorial deadline. differences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Notes on updates can be found in the ap pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Owner's Manual for Navigation.
Entertainment. Communication The Owner's Manual for Navigation. Enter tainment. and Communication can be ob tained as a printed book from the service center.
The topics are also discussed in the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Seite 6
NOTES Information
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Additional sources of informa tion
Service center A service center will be glad to answer questions at any time.
Internet Vehicle information and general informa tion on MINI. e.g. on technology. are availa ble on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed on the Control Display. Ad ditional information. refer to page 60.
MINI Motorer’s Guide app The app specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle. The app can be displayed on smartphones and tablets.
MINI Motorer’s Guide Web Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suita ble information for the selected vehicle. If possible. only equipment and functions that are actually installed in the vehicle will be explained. Driver’s Guide Web can be dis played in any current browser.
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Symbol Meaning
Precautions that must be followed in order to avoid the possibility of injury to yourself and to others as well as serious damage to the vehicle.
Measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.
Control Display texts used to select individual functions.
Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system..
›› ‹‹ Responses generated by the voice activation system.
Action steps Action steps to be carried out are presented as a numbered list. The steps must be car ried out in the defined order.
1. First action step.
2. Second action step.
Enumerations Enumerations without mandatory order or alternative possibilities are presented as a list with bullet points. First possibility.
Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components
This symbol on a vehicle component indicates that further information on the component is available in the Owner's Manual.
Seite 7
Information NOTES
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Vehicle features and options
This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard. country-specific and op tional equipment that is offered in the model series. Therefore. this Owner's Manual also describes and illustrates fea tures and functions that are not available in a vehicle. for example because of the se lected optional features or the country-spe cific version.
This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
For any options and equipment not descri bed in this Owner's Manual. refer to the Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Your dealer’s service center is happy to an swer any questions that you may have about the features and options applicable to your vehicle.
Status of the Owner's Manual
Basic information The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is con ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards. In rare cases. therefore. the fea tures described in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial deadline Due to updates after the editorial deadline. differences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Notes on updates can be found in the ap pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
For Your Own Safety
Manufacturer The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayeri sche Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft.
BMW AG.
Intended use Heed the following when using the vehicle: Owner's Manual.
Information on the vehicle. Do not re move stickers.
Technical vehicle data.
The traffic. speed. and safety laws where the vehicle is driven.
Vehicle documents and statutory docu ments.
Warranty Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration requirements applying in the country of first delivery. also known as homologation.
If your vehicle is to be operated in a differ ent country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing operat ing conditions and registration require ments. If your vehicle does not comply with the homologation requirements in a certain country you may not be able to lodge war ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further information on warranty is available from a service center.
Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology. for instance the use of modern materials and high-performance
Seite 8
NOTES Information
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Parts and accessories The manufacturer of your vehicle recom mends the use of parts and accessory prod ucts approved by the manufacturer of the MINI.
Approved parts and accessories. and advice on their use and installation are available from a MINI dealer's service center.
MINI parts and accessories were tested by the manufacturer of the MINI for their safety and suitability in MINI vehicles.
The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants genuine MINI parts and accessories.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with MINI vehicles without presenting a safety hazard. even if a country-specific of ficial approval was issued. The manufac turer of your vehicle does not evaluate whether these products are suitable for MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning For vehicles sold in California. the law re quires vehicle manufacturers to provide the following warning:
Warning Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Au tomobile components and parts. including components found in the interior furnish ings in a vehicle. contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and repro ductive harm. In addition. certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other re productive harm. Battery posts. terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of Cali fornia to cause cancer. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in labo ratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and wa ter. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve hicle.
Warning Operating. servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals in cluding engine exhaust. carbon monoxide. phthalates. and lead. which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure. avoid breathing ex haust. do not idle the engine except as necessary. service your vehicle in a well ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing
Seite 9
Information NOTES
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publica tion thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the following warranties: New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
Federal Emissions System Defect War ranty.
Federal Emissions Performance War ranty.
California Emission Control System Lim ited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Infor mation Booklet for US models or in the War ranty and Service Guide Booklet for Cana dian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operat ing conditions and homologation require ments in your country and continental re gion in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region. you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating con ditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case. please con tact Customer Relations for further informa tion.
Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety. operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for maintenance measures: MINI Maintenance system.
Service and Warranty Information Book let for US models.
Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
If the vehicle is not maintained or is im properly maintained. this could result in se rious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the MINI New Vehicle Lim ited Warranty.
Refer to chapter engine oil change regard ing recommended service intervals for oil changes.
Data memory
General information Electronic control devices are installed in the vehicle. Electronic control units process data they receive from vehicle sensors. self generate or exchange with each other. Some control units are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or provide assistance dur ing driving. for instance driver assistance systems. Furthermore. control units facili tate comfort or infotainment functions.
Information about stored or exchanged data can be requested from the manufacturer of the vehicle. in a separate booklet. for exam ple.
Personal reference Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehi cle identification number. Depending on the country. the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehicle identification number. li cense plate and corresponding authorities.
In addition. there are other options to track data collected in the vehicle to the driver or vehicle owner. for instance via utilized services.
Seite 10
NOTES Information
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Gasoline engine Depending on the motorization. the full drive power may not be available for ap proximately 30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case. the vehicle will not ac celerate as usual.
Steptronic transmission
Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Engage selector lever position P or N.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a brief time and is stopped as soon as the en gine starts.
Manual transmission
Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neutral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a brief time and is stopped as soon as the en gine starts.
Engine stop
Safety information
Warning Unattended children or animals in the ve hicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic. for in stance due to the following actions: Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Releasing the parking brake.
Opening and closing the doors or windows.
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.
Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting. secure the vehi cle against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se cured against rolling away. follow the fol lowing: Set the parking brake.
On uphill grades or on a downhill slope. turn the front wheels in the di rection of the curb.
On uphill grades or on a downhill slope. also secure the vehicle. for in stance with a wheel chock.
Seite 100
CONTROLS Driving
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Steptronic transmission
Switching off the engine 1. When the vehicle is stationary. apply the parking brake.
2. Engage selector lever position P.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
Manual transmission
Switching off the engine 1. With the vehicle at a standstill. press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function
Concept The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop. for instance in traffic conges tion or at traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on. The engine starts automati cally for driving off.
After each engine start using the Start/Stop button. the Auto Start/Stop function is ready and is activated at speeds faster than about 3 mph/5 km/h.
Depending on the selected driving mode. re fer to page 176. the system is automatically activated or deactivated.
Engine stop
Functional requirements The engine is switched off automatically during a stop under the following condi tions: Manual transmission: Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is not pressed.
The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driver's door is closed.
Steptronic transmission: The selector lever is in selector lever po sition D.
The brake pedal remains depressed while the vehicle is stopped.
The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driver's door is closed.
In order to be able to release the brake pedal. engage the selector lever in position P. The engine remains off.
To continue driving depress the brake pedal. When a gear is engaged. the engine starts automatically.
The air flow from the air conditioner is re duced when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display
The display indicates that the Auto Start/Stop function is ready for an Automatic engine start.
The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic engine stop have not been met.
Seite 101
Driving CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: display
The display indicates that the Auto Start/Stop function is ready for an Automatic engine start.
The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic engine stop have not been met.
Functional limitations The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations: External temperature too low.
The external temperature is high and au tomatic climate control is running.
The car's interior has not yet been heated or cooled to the required level.
The engine is not yet at operating tem perature.
The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being turned.
After driving in reverse.
Fogging of the windows when the auto matic climate control is switched on.
The vehicle battery charge is very low.
At higher elevations.
The hood is unlocked.
The parking assistant is activated.
Stop-and-go traffic.
Selector lever in selector lever position R. N or M/S.
Starting the engine The engine starts automatically under the following conditions:
Manual transmission: clutch pedal is pressed.
Steptronic transmission: by releasing the brake pedal.
After the engine starts. accelerate as usual.
Safety mode After the engine switches off automatically. it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met: The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is open.
The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied length of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop button.
Functional limitations Even if driving off was not intended. the de activated engine starts up automatically in the following situations: Excessive warming of the car's interior when the air conditioning is switched on.
When the steering wheel is turned.
Steptronic transmission: change from selector lever position D to R. N or M/S.
Steptronic transmission: change from selector lever position P to R. N. D or M/S.
The vehicle begins rolling.
Fogging of the windows when the auto matic climate control is switched on.
The vehicle battery charge is very low.
Excessive cooling of the car's interior when the heating is switched on.
Manual transmission: low brake vacuum pressure; this can occur. for instance if the brake pedal is depressed a number of times in succession.
Seite 102
CONTROLS Driving
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Additional Auto Start/Stop function Depending on the vehicle equipment and country-specific version. the vehicle fea tures a variety of sensors for assessing the traffic situation. The Auto Start/Stop func tion uses this information to adapt to vari ous traffic situations in a proactive manner.
For instance. this applies to the following situations: When a situation is detected in which the stopping time is expected to be very short. the engine is not switched off au tomatically. A message appears on the Control Display. depending on the situa tion.
When a situation is detected in which the vehicle needs to drive off immedi ately. the engine is started automati cally.
The function may be restricted if the navi gation data is invalid. outdated or not avail able. for example.
Switching the system on/off
Using the button
Press the button.
LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.
The engine is started during an auto matic engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start/Stop button.
LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop During an automatic engine stop. the vehi cle can be switched off permanently. for in stance when leaving it.
Steptronic transmission:
1. Engage selector lever position P.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.
3. Set the parking brake.
Manual transmission:
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation In certain situations. the Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated automatically for safety reasons. for instance if no driver is detected.
Malfunction The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches off the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the sys tem checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 103
Driving CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Parking brake
Safety information
Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting. secure the vehi cle against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se cured against rolling away. follow the fol lowing: Set the parking brake.
On uphill grades or on a downhill slope. turn the front wheels in the di rection of the curb.
On uphill grades or on a downhill slope. also secure the vehicle. for in stance with a wheel chock.
Applying The lever automatically engages after being pulled up.
The indicator light lights up red. The parking brake is set.
Lower light: indicator light in Cana dian models
If for once use during driving is required. engage the parking brake slightly and hold the button down.
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake action. lightly apply the parking brake peri odically while coasting. if traffic conditions permit.
The brake lights will not light up if the park ing brake is set.
Releasing
Raise lever slightly. press the button and guide the lever down.
Turn signal. high beams. head light flasher
Turn signal
Using turn signals
Press the lever past the resistance point.
Canada: the lever returns into its starting position after actuation. To switch off man ually. slightly tap the lever to the resistance point.
Triple turn signal activation Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The triple turn signal duration can be ad justed.
Seite 104
CONTROLS Driving
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 4. "Exterior lighting" 5. "One-touch turn signal" 6. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
Signaling briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.
Malfunction Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
High beams. headlight flasher Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
High beams on. arrow 1.
The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on.
High beams off/headlight flasher. ar row 2.
Wiper system
General information Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry. as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
Warning If the wipers start moving in the folded away state. body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.
NOTICE If the wipers are frozen to the windshield. the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property.
Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.
Switching on
Press the lever up until the desired position is reached.
Seite 105
Driving CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Resting position of the wipers. posi tion 0.
Intermittent operation or rain sensor. position 1.
Normal wiper speed. position 2.
Fast wiper speed. position 3.
When travel is interrupted with the wiper system switched on: when travel continues. the wipers resume at their previous speed.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down. Switching off: press the lever down until it reaches its standard position.
Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position.
The lever automatically returns to its in itial position when released.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the in tensity of the rainfall.
General information The sensor is located on the windshield. di rectly in front of the interior mirror. With out the rain sensor. the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.
Safety information
NOTICE If the rain sensor is activated. the wipers can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to prop erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.
Activating
Press the lever up once from its standard position. arrow 1.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
In frosty conditions. wiper operation may not start.
Deactivating Press the lever back into the standard posi tion.
Seite 106
CONTROLS Driving
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel.
With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter val.
With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen sor sensitivity.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Windshield washer system
Safety information
Warning The washer fluid can freeze onto the win dow at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer systems. if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti freeze. if needed.
NOTICE When the washer fluid reservoir is empty. the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the windshield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles The washer jets are automatically heated whenever the ignition is switched on.
Rear window wiper
Overview
Switching on Turn the outer switch upward. Resting position of the wiper. posi tion 0.
Intermittent mode. arrow 1. When re verse gear is engaged. the system switches to continuous operation.
Clean the rear window Turn the outer switch in the desired direc tion.
Seite 107
Driving CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
In resting position: turn the switch downward. arrow 3. The switch auto matically returns to its idle position when released.
In intermittent mode: turn the switch further. arrow 2. The switch automati cally returns to its interval position when released.
The function is deactivated if the washer fluid reservoir level is low.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept The fold-away position enables the wipers to be folded away from the windshield.
General information Helpful when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions. for instance.
Safety information
Warning If the wipers start moving in the folded away state. body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.
NOTICE If the wipers are frozen to the windshield. the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property.
Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.
Folding away the wipers 1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down. un til the wipers stop in a close to vertical position.
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield.
Folding down the wipers After the wipers are folded back down. the wiper system must be reactivated.
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the windshield.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation.
Seite 108
CONTROLS Driving
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Canada: wiper system
General information Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry. as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
Warning If the wipers start moving in the folded away state. body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.
NOTICE If the wipers are frozen to the windshield. the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property.
Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.
Switching on
Tap up the lever or press it past the resist ance point. Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once beyond the resistance point.
The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down. To switch off from fast wiper speed: press down twice.
To switch off from normal wiper speed: press down once.
Brief wipe: press down once.
The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the in tensity of the rainfall.
General information The sensor is located on the windshield. di rectly in front of the interior mirror. With out the rain sensor. the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.
Seite 109
Driving CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Operating data in the vehicle Control units process data to operate the ve hicle.
For example. this includes: Status messages for the vehicle and its individual components. e.g. wheel rota tional speed. wheel speed. deceleration. transverse acceleration. engaged safety belt indicator.
Ambient conditions. e.g. temperature. rain sensor signals.
The processed data is only processed in the vehicle itself and generally volatile. The data is not stored beyond the operating pe riod.
Electronic components. e.g. control units and ignition keys. contain components for storing technical information. Information about the vehicle condition. component us age. maintenance requirements events or faults can be stored temporarily or perma nently.
This information generally records the state of a component. a module. a system. or the environment. for instance: Operating states of system components. for instance. fill levels. tire inflation pressure. battery status.
Malfunctions and faults in important system components. for instance lights and brakes.
Responses by the vehicle to special sit uations such as airbag deployment or engagement of the driving stability con trol systems.
Information on vehicle-damaging events.
The data is required to perform the control unit functions. Furthermore. it also serves to recognize and correct malfunctions. and helps the vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions.
The majority of this data is volatile and is only processed within the vehicle itself.
Only a small share of the data is stored event-related in event or fault memories.
When servicing. for instance during repairs. service processes. warranty cases. and qual ity assurance measures. this technical infor mation can be read out from the vehicle to gether with the vehicle identification number.
A dealer’s service center or another quali fied service center or repair shop can read out the information. The socket for OBD On board Diagnosis required by law in the ve hicle is used to read out the data.
The data is collected. processed. and used by the relevant organizations in the service network. The data documents technical con ditions of the vehicle. helps with the identi fication of the fault. compliance with war ranty obligations and quality improvement.
Furthermore. the manufacturer has product monitoring duties to meet in line with prod uct liability law. To fulfill these duties. the vehicle manufacturer needs technical data from the vehicle. The data from the vehicle can also be used to check customer claims for warranty and guaranty.
Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be reset when a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop performs repair or servicing work.
Data entry and data transfer into the vehicle
General information Depending on the vehicle equipment. com fort and individual settings can be stored in the vehicle and modified or reset at any time.
For example. this includes:
Seite 11
Information NOTES
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Safety information
NOTICE If the rain sensor is activated. the wipers can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to prop erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.
Activating/deactivating
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Wiping is started.
If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor: the LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
In frosty conditions. wiper operation may not start.
If a journey is interrupted with the rain sen sor switched on: if the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes. the rain sensor is automatically activated again.
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel.
With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter val.
With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen sor sensitivity.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Windshield washer system
Safety information
Warning The washer fluid can freeze onto the win dow at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer systems. if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti freeze. if needed.
NOTICE When the washer fluid reservoir is empty. the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.
Seite 110
CONTROLS Driving
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the windshield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles The washer jets are automatically heated whenever the ignition is switched on.
Rear window wiper
Overview
Switching on Turn the outer switch upward. Resting position of the wiper. posi tion 0.
Intermittent mode. arrow 1. When re verse gear is engaged. the system switches to continuous operation.
Clean the rear window Turn the outer switch in the desired direc tion.
In resting position: turn the switch downward. arrow 3. The switch auto matically returns to its idle position when released.
In intermittent mode: turn the switch further. arrow 2. The switch automati cally returns to its interval position when released.
The function is deactivated if the washer fluid reservoir level is low.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept The fold-away position enables the wipers to be folded away from the windshield.
General information Helpful when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions. for instance.
Safety information
Warning If the wipers start moving in the folded away state. body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.
NOTICE If the wipers are frozen to the windshield. the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property.
Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.
Seite 111
Driving CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Folding away the wipers 1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press the wiper lever up past the point of resistance and hold it for approx.
3 seconds. until the wipers remain in a nearly vertical position.
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield.
Folding down the wipers After the wipers are folded back down. the wiper system must be reactivated.
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the windshield.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation.
Washer fluid
General information All washer nozzles are supplied from one reservoir.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield washer concentrate. If desired. a windshield washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
Warning Some antifreeze agents can contain harm ful substances and are flammable. There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ra tio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allow able washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid container.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Con centrate or the equivalent is recom mended.
Warning Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop erty. Only add washer fluid when the en gine is cooled down. Next. fully close the lid of the washer fluid reservoir.
Seite 112
CONTROLS Driving
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
NOTICE Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on the windows can lead to damage to the wash ing system. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add silicon-containing ad ditives to the washer fluid.
NOTICE Mixing different windshield washer con centrates or antifreeze can damage the washing system. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not mix different wind shield washer concentrates or antifreeze.
Follow the information and mixing ratios provided on the containers.
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment.
Malfunction The use of undiluted windshield washer concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to incorrect readings at temperatures below +5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Manual transmission
Safety information
Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting. secure the vehi cle against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se cured against rolling away. follow the fol lowing: Set the parking brake.
On uphill grades or on a downhill slope. turn the front wheels in the di rection of the curb.
On uphill grades or on a downhill slope. also secure the vehicle. for in stance with a wheel chock.
NOTICE When shifting to a lower gear. excessive speeds can damage the engine. There is a risk of damage to property. When shifting into 5th or 6th gear. press the gearshift lever to the right.
Schematic diagram
1–6: forward gears.
R: reverse gear.
Seite 113
Driving CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Shifting
General information Depending on the engine installation. the engine speed during a shifting operation is adjusted automatically as required for har monious and dynamic gear shifting.
Reverse gear Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
To overcome the resistance push the gear shift lever dynamically to the left and en gage reverse gear with a forward shifting movement.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle In some situations. the vehicle is to roll without its own power. for instance in a car wash. or be pushed.
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift out of a forward gear or reverse.
3. Release the parking brake.
Steptronic transmission
Concept The Steptronic transmission combines the functions of an automatic transmission with the possibility of manual shifting. if needed.
Safety information
Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting. secure the vehi cle against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se cured against rolling away. follow the fol lowing: Set the parking brake.
On uphill grades or on a downhill slope. turn the front wheels in the di rection of the curb.
On uphill grades or on a downhill slope. also secure the vehicle. for in stance with a wheel chock.
Selector lever version
General information Depending on the vehicle equipment. a transmission with either a latching selector lever or a tap-operated selector lever is in stalled.
Transmission with a latching selector lever
The selector lever positions P. R. N. and D are selected by moving the selector lever into the respective selector lever position.
The selector lever engages in the selector lever positions.
Seite 114
CONTROLS Driving
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Transmission with a tap-operated selector lever
The selector lever positions R. N. and D are selected by tapping the selector lever for ward or back. The selector lever automati cally returns to the center position when re leased.
The selector lever position P is engaged by pressing the P button on the selector lever or. in certain situations. automatically. refer to page 115.
Selector lever positions
Drive mode D Selector lever position for normal vehicle operation. All gears for forward travel are activated automatically.
R is reverse Engage selector lever position R only when the vehicle is stationary.
Neutral N The vehicle may be pushed or roll without engine power in selector lever position N. for instance in vehicle washes. refer to page 117.
Parking position P
General information Selector lever position. for instance for parking the vehicle.
The transmission blocks the drive wheels in selector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position P only when the vehicle is stationary.
Before exiting the vehicle. make sure that selector lever position P is set. Otherwise. the vehicle may begin to move.
Automatic parking position for a transmission with a tap-operated selector lever Selector lever position P is engaged auto matically in situations such as the follow ing: After the engine is switched off when the vehicle is in the radio-ready state. refer to page 99. or when the ignition is switched off. refer to page 98. while se lector lever position R. D or M/S is en gaged.
If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled. the driver's door is opened. and the brake pedal is not pressed while the ve hicle is stationary and selector lever po sition D. M/S or R is engaged.
After the ignition has been switched off while selector lever position N is en gaged.
Engaging selector lever positions: with a latching selector lever
General information To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a drive mode. maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Functional requirements The selector lever can only be taken out of selector lever position P if the ignition is on or the engine is running.
Seite 115
Driving CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Engaging selector lever position D. N.
R. or P With the vehicle stationary. depress the brake pedal before shifting out of selector lever position P or N; otherwise. the shift block will not be deactivated and the shift command will not be executed.
A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty operation: Unintentional shifting into selector lever position P or R.
Unintentional shifting from selector lever position P into another selector lever position.
1. To release the selector lever lock: with the brake pedal depressed. press the button on the front of the selector lever.
2. Move the selector lever into the desired position.
Engaging selector lever positions: with a tap-operated selector lever
General information To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a drive mode. maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Functional requirements Only when the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to change from selector lever posi tion P to another selector lever position.
Depending on the transmission version. the engine may have to be running too.
The selection lever position P cannot be changed until all technical requirements are met.
Engaging selector lever position D. N. A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty operation: Unintentional shifting into selector lever position R.
Unintentional shifting from selector lever position P into another selector lever position.
1. Press and hold the button to release the selector lever lock.
2. With the driver's safety belt fastened. briefly push the selector lever in the de sired direction. past a resistance point.
Seite 116
CONTROLS Driving
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Engaging selector lever position P
Press button P.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
General information In some situations. the vehicle is to roll without its own power for a short distance. for instance in a car wash. or be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N: with a latching selector lever 1. Switch on the ignition.
2. If necessary. release the parking brake.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Touch the selector lever lock and en gage selector lever position N.
5. Release brake.
The vehicle can roll.
If there is a malfunction. you may not be able to change the selector lever position.
Manually unlock the transmission lock. if needed. refer to page 120.
Engaging selector lever position N: with a tap-operated selector lever 1. Start the engine while pressing on the brake pedal.
2. If necessary. release the parking brake.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Touch the selector lever lock and en gage selector lever position N.
5. Switch the engine off.
In this way. the ignition remains switched on. and a Check Control mes sage is displayed.
The vehicle can roll.
NOTICE Selector lever position P is automatically engaged when the ignition is switched off.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not switch ignition off in vehicle washes.
Irrespective of the ignition. the selector lever position P is automatically engaged af ter approx. 15 minutes.
If there is a malfunction. you may not be able to change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock. if needed. refer to page 120.
Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driv ing performance. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.
Seite 117
Driving CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Sport program M/S
Concept The shifting points and shifting times in the Sport program are designed for a sportier driving style. The transmission. for instance shifts up later and the shifting times are shorter.
Activating the Sport program
Press the selector lever to the left from se lector lever position D.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru ment cluster. for instance S1.
The sport program of the transmission is ac tivated.
Ending the Sport program Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Manual mode M/S
Concept Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode.
Activating manual mode 1. Press the selector lever to the left from selector lever position D. arrow 1.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it backward. arrows 2.
Manual mode M/S becomes active and the gear is changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru ment cluster. for instance M1.
Shifting To shift down: press the selector lever forward.
To shift up: pull the selector lever rear wards.
The Steptronic transmission continues shifting automatically in certain situations. for instance when certain engine speed lim its are reached.
With a tap-operated selector lever: when M2 is set manually while the vehicle is sta tionary. the transmission will no longer shift back to M1. This shifting behavior is retained until you engage M1 manually or exit M.
Avoiding automatic upshifting Once a particular engine speed is attained.
M/S manual mode is automatically up shifted as needed.
John Cooper Works: once particular engine speeds are attained. upshifting is not auto matically performed in M/S manual mode.
Seite 118
CONTROLS Driving
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmis sion. automatic shift operations are not per formed if one of the following conditions is met: DSC is deactivated.
TRACTION is activated.
John Cooper Works GP: GP MODE is ac tivated.
In addition. there is no downshifting for kickdown.
With the appropriate transmission version. the lowest possible gear can be selected by simultaneously activating kickdown and op erating the left shift paddles. This is not possible by switching briefly via the shift paddles from selector lever position D to manual mode M/S.
Ending the manual mode Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles for Steptronic Sport transmission
Concept The shift paddles on the steering wheel al low you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel.
General information
Shifting Gears will only be shifted at appropriate en gine and road speeds. for instance down shifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high.
Short-term manual mode In selector lever position D. actuating a shift paddle switches into manual mode temporarily.
After conservative driving in manual mode without acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles for a certain amount of time. the transmission switches back to automatic mode.
It is possible to switch into automatic mode as follows: Keep the right shift paddle pulled until D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
In addition to the pulled right shift pad dle. pull the left shift paddle.
Continuous manual mode In selector lever position S. actuating a shift paddle switches into manual mode perma nently.
Shifting
Shifting up: pull the right shift paddle.
Shifting down: pull left shift paddle.
Downshifting to the lowest possible gear: keep the left shift paddle pulled.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster. followed by the current gear.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is displayed. for example P.
Seite 119
Driving CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Settings for the seat and steering wheel positions.
Suspension and climate control settings.
If necessary. data can be transferred to the entertainment and communication system of the vehicle. for instance via smartphone.
This includes the following depending on the respective equipment: Multimedia data such as music. films or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system.
Address book data for use in conjunc tion with an integrated hands-free sys tem or an integrated navigation system.
Entered navigation destinations.
Data on the use of Internet services.
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is found on a device that has been con nected to the vehicle. e.g. a smartphone.
USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle. it can be deleted at any time.
This data is only transmitted to third parties upon personal request as part of the use of online services. The transmission depends on the selected settings for the use of the services.
Incorporation of mobile devices Depending on the vehicle equipment. mo bile devices connected to the vehicle. for in stance smartphones. can be controlled via the vehicle control elements.
The sound and picture from the mobile de vice can be played back and displayed through the multimedia system. Certain in formation is transferred to the mobile de vice at the same time. Depending on the type of incorporation. this includes. for in stance position data and other general vehi cle information. This optimizes the way in which selected apps. for instance navigation or music playback. work.
There is no further interaction between the mobile device and the vehicle. such as ac tive access to vehicle data.
How the data will be processed further is determined by the provider of the particular app being used. The extent of the possible settings depends on the respective app and the operating system of the mobile device.
Services
General information If the vehicle has a wireless network con nection. this enables data to be exchanged between the vehicle and other systems. The wireless network connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devices brought into the vehicle. for instance smartphones. This wireless network connection enables 'online functions' to be used. These include online services and apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.
Services from the vehicle manufacturer Where online services from the vehicle manufacturer are concerned. the corre sponding functions are described in the ap propriate place. for instance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's website. The rele vant legal information pertaining to data protection is provided there too. Personal data may be used to perform online serv ices. Data is exchanged over a secure con nection. for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle manufacturer intended for this purpose.
Any collection. processing. and use of per sonal data above and beyond that needed to provide the services must always be based on a legal permission. contractual arrange ment or consent. It is also possible to acti vate or deactivate the data connection as a whole. That is. with the exception of func
Seite 12
NOTES Information
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Releasing the transmission lock manually: with a latching selector lever If the selector lever is locked in selector lever position P despite the ignition being switched on. the brake pedal being de pressed and the button on the selector lever being pressed. the transmission lock can be unlocked manually: Before unlocking the transmission lock manually. engage the parking brake force fully to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.
1. Loosen the selector lever sleeve. to gether with the lower retaining ring. from the center console. To do so. pull the retaining ring upward at the rear edge.
2. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connec tor. if needed.
3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit. refer to page 283. press the yellow release lever downward. see arrow.
4. Press the button on the front of the se lector lever and move the selector lever back slightly.
Release the release lever.
5. Bring the selector lever into the desired position.
For additional information. see the chapter on tow-starting and towing.
Releasing the transmission lock electronically: with a tap-operated selector lever
General information Electronically unlock the transmission lock to maneuver vehicle from a danger area.
Before unlocking the transmission lock. set the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.
Engaging selector lever position N Unlocking is possible. if the starter can spin the engine.
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must audibly start.
3. Press the button on the selector lever. arrow 1. and press and hold the selector lever into selector lever position N. ar row N. until selector lever position N is displayed in the instrument cluster.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Seite 120
CONTROLS Driving
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
4. Release the selector lever.
5. Release brake. as soon as the starter stops.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area and secure it against moving on its own.
For additional information. see the chapter on tow-starting and towing.
Steptronic Sport transmission: Launch Control
Concept Launch Control enables optimum accelera tion on surfaces with good traction under dry surrounding conditions.
General information The use of Launch Control causes prema ture component wear since this function represents a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in. refer to page 230. period.
Do not turn the steering wheel when driv ing away with Launch Control.
Functional requirements Launch Control is available as soon as the engine and transmission are at operating temperature.
Depending on the external temperature and driving style. the engine and transmission require an interrupted trip of up to 30 miles/50 km in order to reach the oper ating temperature needed for Launch Con trol.
Start with launch control While the engine is running:
Press button and select SPORT with the MINI Driving Modes switch.
The instrument cluster displays TRAC TION in combination with SPORT. The DSC OFF indicator light lights up.
John Cooper Works GP: press button to activate GP MODE. GP MODE is dis played in the instrument cluster. The DSC OFF indicator light lights up.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
3. With the left foot. forcefully press down on the brake.
4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position. kickdown.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instru ment cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait briefly until the engine speed is con stant. Keep accelerator pedal in this po sition.
6. Release the brake within 3 seconds after the flag symbol illuminates.
The vehicle accelerates.
Upshifting occurs automatically as long as the flag symbol is displayed and the accelerator pedal is not released.
Repeated use during a trip After Launch Control has been used. the transmission must cool down for approx.
5 minutes before Launch Control can be used again.
After using Launch Control To increase vehicle stability. activate DSC Dynamic Stability Control again.
System limits An experienced driver may be able to ach ieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
Seite 121
Driving CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Displays
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: overview
Tachometer 130
Indicator/warning lights
Speedometer
Fuel gauge 129
Display/reset miles 130
Electronic displays 124
Seite 122
CONTROLS Displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: overview
Tachometer 130
Display/reset miles 130
Electronic displays 125
Vehicle speed
Indicator/warning lights
Fuel gauge 129
Seite 123
Displays CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Instrument cluster without additional functions: electronic displays
Driver assistance systems Messages. for instance Check Control Time 130 External temperature 130 Selection lists 134 Total miles/trip odometer 130
Onboard Computer 135
Selector lever position 114 Gear shift indicator 132
MINI Driving Modes switch sta tus 176
Seite 124
CONTROLS Displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: electronic displays
Selector lever position 114 Gear shift indicator 132
Time 130 MINI Driving Modes switch sta tus 176 John Cooper Works GP: GP MODE 175
Driver assistance systems
External temperature 130 Range 131
Messages. for instance Check Control Selection lists 134 Navigation instructions
Total miles/trip odometer 130 Onboard Computer 135
Check Control
Concept The Check Control system monitors func tions in the vehicle and notifies you of mal functions in the monitored systems.
General information A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lights and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
In addition. an acoustic signal may be out put and a SMS text message may appear on the Control Display.
Indicator/warning lights
General information The indicator/warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Seite 125
Displays CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Indicator light flashes or is illumi nated: safety belt on the driver or passenger side is not buckled. The safety belt reminder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are posi tioned correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner may not be working.
Have the vehicle checked immedi ately by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
For releasing the parking brake. re fer to page 104.
Approach control warning
Indicator light illuminates: advance warning is issued. for example when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Increase the distance.
Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the ve hicle approaches another vehicle at a rela tively high differential speed.
Intervene by braking or make an evasive maneuver.
Person warning
If a collision with a detected person is imminent. the symbol lights up and a signal sounds.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: orange lights
Active Cruise Control
The number bars shows the selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead.
Camera-based cruise control. refer to page 178.
Vehicle detection. Active Cruise Control
Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle has been detected ahead of you.
Indicator light flashes: the condi tions are not adequate for the system to work.
The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until the driver actively resumes control of the vehicle by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
Yellow lights
Antilock Braking System ABS
The Brake Assistant function may not activate. Avoid abrupt braking.
Take the longer braking distance into account.
Have the system immediately checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 126
CONTROLS Displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The indicator light flashes: DSC con trols the drive and braking forces.
The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify your driving style to the driving circumstances.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has mal functioned.
Have the system checked by a dealer's serv ice center or another qualified service cen ter or repair shop.
DSC. refer to page 173.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
DSC is deactivated or DTC is acti vated.
DSC. refer to page 173. and DTC. re fer to page 174.
John Cooper Works GP: Dynamic Stability Control DSC deactivated or GP MODE activated
DSC is deactivated or GP MODE is activated.
DSC. refer to page 173. and GP MODE. refer to page 175.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The FTM signals a loss of tire infla tion pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cau tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Flat Tire Monitor. refer to page 159.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The indicator light illuminates: the Tire Pressure Monitor reports a low tire inflation pressure or a flat tire.
Follow the information in the Check Control message.
The indicator light flashes and is then illu minated continuously: flat tires or tire pres sure losses cannot be detected. Interference caused by systems or devi ces with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference. the system automatically becomes active again.
TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is mounted: have it checked by a deal er’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed.
Malfunction: have the system checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Tire Pressure Monitor. refer to page 154.
Steering system
Steering system may not be working.
Have the system checked by a deal er's service center or another quali fied service center or repair shop.
Emissions
The warning light lights up: Emissions are deteriorating.
Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The warning light flashes under certain circumstances: This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine.
Seite 127
Displays CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise. serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control components. in particular the catalytic converter.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis. refer to page 282.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indi cator light indicates that a turn sig nal bulb has failed.
Turn signal. refer to page 104.
Parking lights. headlight
Parking lights or headlights are switched on.
Parking lights/low beams. headlight control. refer to page 144.
Front fog lights
Front fog lights are switched on.
Front fog lights. refer to page 147.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off automatically depending on the traf fic situation.
High-beam Assistant. refer to page 146.
Cruise control
The system is switched on. It main tains the speed that was set using
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are switched on.
High beams. refer to page 105.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Continuous display Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and are not cleared until the malfunction is eliminated. If several mal functions occur at once. the messages are displayed consecutively.
The messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time. they are dis played again automatically.
Temporary display Some Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check Control messages are stored and can be displayed again later.
Seite 128
CONTROLS Displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Displaying stored Check Control messages Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
"Check Control"
4. Select the SMS text message.
Display
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is displayed or stored.
SMS text messages SMS text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator/warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages Additional information. such as on the cause of an error or the required action. can be called up via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Depending on the Check Control message. further help can be selected.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
"Check Control"
4. Select the desired text message.
5. Select the desired setting.
Messages after trip completion Certain messages displayed while driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched off.
Fuel gauge
Concept The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis played.
General information Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to vary.
Information on refueling. refer to page 244.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display
The arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: display
The arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Indicator light in the instrument cluster
The yellow indicator light illumi nates. once the fuel reserve is reached.
Seite 129
Displays CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Services from other providers When using online services from other pro viders. these services are the responsibility of the relevant provider and subject to their data privacy conditions and terms of use.
The vehicle manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged during this proc ess. Information on the way in which per sonal data is collected and used in relation to services from third parties. the scope of such data. and its purpose. can be obtained from the relevant service provider.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record. in certain crash or near crash like situations. such as an air bag deploy ment or hitting a road obstacle. data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time. typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re cord such data as: How various systems in your vehicle were operating.
Whether or not the driver and passen ger safety belts were fastened.
How far. if at all. the driver was depress ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better under standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data
Vehicle identification number
Engine compartment
The vehicle identification number can be found in the engine compartment. on the right-hand side of the vehicle.
Seite 13
Information NOTES
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range. the fuel supply is reduced to protect the engine.
Odometer and trip odometer
Concept The total mileage driven and the mileage driven since the last reset are displayed in the instrument cluster.
Instrument cluster without additional functions: reset trip distance
Press the button. The odometer is displayed when the ignition is switched off.
When the ignition is switched on. the trip od ometer is reset.
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: reset trip distance
Press the button. The odometer is displayed when the ignition is switched off.
When the ignition is switched on. the trip od ometer is reset.
External temperature
General information If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃. a sig nal sounds.
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Safety information
Warning Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃ there can be a risk of icy roads. for in stance on bridges or shady sections of the road. There is a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to the weather condi tions at low temperatures.
Display
The external temperature is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Time
The time is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Set the time on the Central In formation Display (CID). refer to page 48.
Seite 130
CONTROLS Displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Date
The date is displayed in the in strument cluster.
Set the date on the Central In formation Display (CID). refer to page 49.
Range
General information When the remaining range is low: A Check Control message is displayed briefly.
The remaining range is shown on the Onboard Computer.
With a dynamic driving style. for in stance fast cornering. the engine func tion is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears contin uously below a range of approx.
30 miles/50 km.
Safety information
NOTICE With a driving range of less than 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel promptly.
Display
The current range is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Displaying the cruising range Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Instrument panel" 5. "Range"
Current consumption
Concept Displays the current fuel consumption.
Check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmentally-friendly manner.
Displaying the current consumption Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Instrument panel" 5. "Current consumption"
Service notifications
Concept The function displays the service notifica tions and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
General information After the ignition is switched on the instru ment cluster briefly displays available driv
Seite 131
Displays CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Display
Detailed information on service notifications More information on the type of service re quired may be displayed on the Control Dis play.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
"Service required" Maintenance and service measures and legally mandated inspections are dis played.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed infor mation.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently re quired.
The deadline for scheduled maintenance or a legally mandated inspection is ap proaching.
The service deadline has al ready passed.
Entering appointment dates Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle inspections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
"Service required"
4. "Vehicle inspection" 5. "Date:" 6. Select the desired setting.
Automatic Service Request Data regarding the service status or legally mandated vehicle inspections is automati cally transmitted to your dealer’s service center before your vehicle is due for serv ice.
You can check when your dealer’s service center was notified.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status" 3. Move the Controller to the left.
"Teleservice Call"
Gear shift indicator
Concept The system recommends the most efficient gear for the current driving situation.
General information Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version. the gear shift indicator is active in the manual mode of the Steptronic transmission and with manual transmission.
Suggestions to shift up or down are dis played in the instrument cluster.
Seite 132
CONTROLS Displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Manual transmission: displaying
Example Description
Efficient gear is set.
Depending on the equipment version. shift to a more effi cient gear.
Steptronic transmission: displaying
Example Description
Efficient gear is set.
Depending on the equipment version. shift to a more effi cient gear.
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
Concept Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi mum permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
General information The camera at the base of the interior mir ror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet road con ditions. etc. are also detected and compared with the vehicle's onboard data. such as
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in as sessing visibility and traffic situation.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap propriate.
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.
Display Depending on the vehicle equipment. Speed Limit Info is displayed permanently in the
Seite 133
Displays CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Press button on the turn signal lever several times. if needed.
Speed Limit Info is displayed in the instru ment cluster.
Speed Limit Info
The last speed limit detected.
With navigation system: Speed Limit Info is not availa ble.
Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.
System limits The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the following situations: In heavy fog. wet conditions. or snow fall.
When traffic signs are fully or partially concealed by objects. stickers or paint.
When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.
When driving toward bright lights or strong reflections.
When the windshield in front of the in terior mirror is fogged over. dirty or cov ered by a sticker. etc.
In the event of incorrect detection by the camera.
If the speed limits stored in the naviga tion system are incorrect.
In areas not covered by the navigation system.
When roads differ from the navigation. such as due to changes in road routing.
When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker.
If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
When traffic signs that are valid for a parallel road are detected.
During calibration of the camera imme diately after vehicle delivery.
Selection lists
General information Depending on the vehicle equipment. the buttons on the steering wheel and the dis play in the instrument cluster can be used to display or use the following: Current audio source.
Phone redial.
Turn on voice activation system.
Seite 134
CONTROLS Displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Activating a list and adjusting the setting
Button on the steering wheel
Function
Move selection up.
Move selection down.
Confirm the selec tion.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: display
Onboard Computer
Concept The Onboard Computer displays different vehicle data in the instrument cluster. such as average values.
Calling up information
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Information is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the but ton on the turn signal lever calls up the following informa tion:
Range.
GREEN Info.
When GREEN Mode is activated.
Average consumption. fuel.
Average consumption since delivery from the factory.
Current consumption. fuel.
Average speed.
Date.
Engine temperature display.
With equipment version with Head-up Display and navigation:
Seite 135
Displays CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.
With equipment version with Head-up Display and navigation: Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: Speed Limit Info.
Vehicle speed.
Trip odometer.
The unit of some information can be changed.
Setting units. refer to page 49.
Selecting information Depending on the vehicle equipment. you can select what information from the On board Computer can be accessed in the in strument cluster.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Instrument panel" 5. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
Information in detail
Range Displays the estimated cruising range avail able with the remaining fuel.
The range is calculated based on your driv ing style over the last 20 miles/30 km.
GREEN info The achieved range extension may be dis played as a bonus range.
Average consumption The average consumption is calculated for the period while the engine is running.
The average consumption is calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset by the Onboard Computer.
Average speed Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped are not in cluded in the calculation of the average speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold the button on the turn signal lever.
Engine temperature display
Concept The current engine temperature. based on a combination of coolant and engine oil tem perature is displayed. As soon as the opti mum operating temperature has been at tained. the indicator is in the center position.
Seite 136
CONTROLS Displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
General information If the engine oil or coolant. and thus the en gine. become too hot. a Check Control mes sage is displayed too.
When the engine temperature is too high. a red indicator light is dis played.
When the engine oil temperature is too high. a red indicator light is dis played.
To check the coolant level. refer to page 279.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: display
Distance to destination Depending on the vehicle equipment. the distance remaining to the destination is dis played if a destination is entered in the nav igation system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted automatically.
Time of arrival Depending on the vehicle equipment. the estimated time of arrival is displayed if a destination is entered in the navigation sys tem before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Instrument cluster without additional functions: Speed Limit Info Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi mum permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
Onboard Computer on the Control Display
Concept The Onboard Computer displays different vehicle data on the Control Display. such as average values.
General information Two types of Onboard Computers are availa ble on the Control Display: "Onboard info": average values. such as the consumption. are displayed. The val ues can be reset individually.
"Trip computer": the values deliver an overview of a specific route and can be reset as often as necessary.
Calling up the Onboard Computer or trip computer Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Driving information" 3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Seite 137
Displays CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Resetting the Onboard Computer Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Driving information" 3. "Onboard info" 4. "Consumption" or "Speed" 5. "OK"
Resetting the trip computer Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Driving information" 3. "Trip computer" 4. Move the Controller to the left. if needed.
"Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatic reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehi cle has come to a standstill.
5. If necessary. "OK"
Driving Excitement
Concept On the Control Display. sport instruments can be displayed. and the vehicle state can be checked before the use of the SPORT program.
Sport instruments
General information On the Control Display. values for power and torque are displayed.
Displaying sport instruments Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Technology in action" 3. "Sport displays"
"Sports instruments"
Via MINI Driving Modes switch:
1. Activate SPORT.
2. "Sport displays"
"Sports instruments"
Vehicle state
General information The following vehicle and surrounding area data is automatically checked and evaluated in succession: Range.
Engine temperature.
External temperature.
SPORT program state.
Finally. a total evaluation of the vehicle state is displayed.
Checking vehicle state Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Technology in action" 3. "Sport displays"
"Vehicle and surroundings"
Via the MINI Driving Modes switch:
1. Activate SPORT.
2. "Sport displays"
"Vehicle and surroundings"
Seite 138
CONTROLS Displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Speed warning
Concept A speed limit can be set that when reached will cause a warning to be issued.
General information The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit again. after it has dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Adjusting Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning" 4. "Warning at:" 5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
Activating/deactivating Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Speed warning" 4. "Speed warning"
Setting your current speed as the speed warning Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Speed warning" 4. "Select current speed"
LED ring on the central in strument cluster
Concept The LED ring displays light animations to represent specific functions.
Basic displays Basic functions. for instance the tachome ter. can be set to be displayed continually if so desired.
John Cooper Works GP: the acceleration force can be set as basic display of the LED ring.
Event displays Functions that are only displayed tempora rily. for instance the volume or temperature settings. can be set as event displays.
Several vehicle assistance functions can also be displayed on the LED ring. This dis play corresponds with the displays of the function in the respective display.
Example: tachometer Like the tachometer in the instrument clus ter. the light animations of the tachometer's basic display show the current RPMs and the respective RPM warning thresholds.
Display
Arrow 1: current RPM.
Seite 139
Displays CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Windshield
The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause in jury or death. you should immediately in form the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA. in addition to noti fying MINI of North America. LLC. P.O. Box 1227. Westwood. New Jersey 07675-1227.
Telephone 1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints. it may open an investigation. and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of ve hicles. it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However. NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you. your dealer. or MINI of North America. LLC.
To contact NHTSA. you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra tor. NHTSA. 1200 New Jersey Avenue. SE..
Washington. DC 20590. You can also obtain
For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada.
Defect Investigations and Recalls. may call the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about mo tor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety.
Seite 14
NOTES Information
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Arrow 2: prewarning field.
Arrow 3: warning field.
Switching on/off LED ring Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Center Instrument" 5. "Center Instrument"
Adjusting the LED ring Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Center Instrument" 5. "Basic display" or "Event display" 6. Select the desired setting.
Setting the brightness The brightness can be adjusted when night lighting is active in the instrument cluster.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Center Instrument" 5. "Brightness at night" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired brightness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.
Head-up Display
Concept This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision. for instance the speed.
The driver can get information without averting his or her eyes from the road.
General information Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-up Display. For additional informa tion. see the chapter on care.
Safety information
Warning When extending and retracting the projec tion screen of the Head-up Display. body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of in jury. Make sure that the area of movement of the projection screen is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE The Head-up Display consists of sensitive components that can easily be scraped or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not place any objects on the Head-up Display. attach to system compo nents or plug into the system. Do not move the moving parts manually.
Seite 140
CONTROLS Displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Overview
Switching the Head-up Display on/off When switching on. the projection lens of the Head-up Display is extended. When switching off. the projection lens of the Head-up Display is retracted again.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Head-Up Display"
Display
Overview The following information is displayed on the Head-up Display: Vehicle speed.
Navigation instructions.
Check Control messages.
Selection list from the instrument clus ter.
Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed briefly as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up Display Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Displayed information" 6. Select the desired displays in the Head up Display.
Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.
Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Brightness" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired brightness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
When the low beams are switched on. the brightness of the Head-up Display can be additionally influenced using the instru ment lighting. refer to page 148.
The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.
Adjusting the height Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
Seite 141
Displays CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
3. "Displays" 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Height" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is reached.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.
Setting the rotation The screen of the Head-up Display can be rotated around its own axis.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Rotation" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired set ting is selected.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.
Display visibility The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Display is influenced by the following fac tors: Certain sitting positions.
Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis play.
Sunglasses with certain polarization fil ters.
Wet roads.
Unfavorable light conditions.
John Cooper Works: sport dis plays in the Head-up Display
General information The sport displays in the Head-up Display assist with a sporty driving style.
Switching on Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Displayed information" 6. "Sport displays" With navigation system: if the sport dis plays are switched on. no navigation con tent will be displayed on the Head-up Dis play.
Display
Vehicle speed
Shift point indicator
Gear display
Current engine speed
Warning field. speed
Seite 142
CONTROLS Displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Shift point indicator
Concept The shift point indicator in the Head-up Display indicates the optimum shifting point. Thus. with a sporty driving style. the best possible vehicle acceleration is ach ieved.
Functional requirements Steptronic Sport transmission: Manual mode M/S and. if necessary. Dy namic Traction Control DTC are acti vated.
Press the accelerator pedal all the way down.
Display Successive gray illuminated fields indicate the upcoming shift moment.
Shift up immediately when the red fields light up.
When the maximum speed is reached. the entire display flashes red and the supply of fuel is interrupted in order to protect the engine.
Vehicle status
General information The status can be displayed and actions per formed for several systems.
Opening the vehicle status Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance
Symbols Description
"Flat Tire Monitor": status of the run-flat tires. refer to page 159.
"Tire Pressure Monitor": sta tus of the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM. refer to page 154.
"Engine oil level": Electronic engine oil level check. refer to page 275.
"Check Control": Check Con trol messages are stored in the background and can be displayed on the Control Display. Displaying stored Check Control messages. re fer to page 129.
"Service required": display ing service notifications. re fer to page 131.
"Teleservice Call": Serv ice Request.
Seite 143
Displays CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Lights
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Overview
Switches in the vehicle
The light switch element is located next to the steering wheel.
Symbol Function
Front fog lights.
Automatic headlight control.
Cornering light.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Symbol Function
Parking lights.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Parking lights. low beams and roadside parking lights
General information Position of switch:
If the driver's door is opened when the igni tion is switched off. the exterior lighting is automatically switched off.
Parking lights Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended periods; otherwise. the battery may become discharged and it would then be impossible to start the engine.
When parking. switch on the one-sided roadside parking light. refer to page 145.
Low beams Position of switch:
The low beams light up when the ignition is switched on.
Seite 144
CONTROLS Lights
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Canada: roadside parking light
Concept The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
With radio-ready state switched off. press the lever either up or down past the resist ance point for approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.
Welcome lights and pathway lighting
Welcome lights
General information Depending on the vehicle equipment and the ambient brightness. individual light functions may be switched on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked.
Activating/deactivating Position of switch:
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting" 4. "Exterior lighting" 5. "Welcome lights" The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.
Pathway lighting
General information The low beams stay lit for a short while if the headlight flasher is switched on after the vehicle's radio-ready state is switched off.
Setting the duration Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 4. "Exterior lighting" 5. "Pathway lighting" 6. Set length of time.
The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.
Automatic headlight control
Concept The low beams are switched on and off au tomatically depending on the ambient brightness. for example in tunnels. in twi light or if there is precipitation.
General information A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on.
Activating Position of switch:
Seite 145
Lights CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low beams are switched on.
System limits The automatic headlight control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judg ment of lighting conditions.
For example. the sensors are unable to de tect fog or hazy weather. In these situa tions. switch the lights on manually.
Daytime running lights
General information Position of switch:
The daytime running lights light up when the ignition is switched on. After the igni tion is switched off. the parking lights light up in position
Activating/deactivating In some countries. daytime running lights are mandatory. so it may not be possible to deactivate the daytime running lights.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 4. "Exterior lighting" 5. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the currently used vehicle key.
Cornering light
General information Position of switch:
In tight curves. for instance on mountain ous roads or when turning. an additional. cornering light is switched on that lights up the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a certain speed.
The cornering light is automatically switched on depending on the steering an gle or. where applicable. the use of turn sig nals.
When driving in reverse. the cornering lights may be automatically switched on re gardless of the steering angle.
Adaptive headlight range con trol
The adaptive headlight range control fea ture balances out acceleration and braking processes as well as the vehicle load condi tions in order to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Illumination of the road is optimized.
High-beam Assistant
Concept The high-beam Assistant detects other traf fic participants early on and automatically switches the high beams on or off depend ing on the traffic situation.
General information The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on. whenever the traffic situation allows. In the low speed range. the high beams are not switched on by the system.
The system responds to light from oncom ing traffic and traffic driving ahead of you. and to ambient lighting. for instance in towns and cities.
Seite 146
CONTROLS Lights
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
The high beams can be switched on and off manually at any time.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch. depending on the vehicle equipment:
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low beams are switched on.
The headlights are automatically switched between low beams and high beams.
The blue indicator light in the instru ment cluster lights up when the sys tem switches on the high beams.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when manually switching the high beams on and off. refer to page 105.
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant. press the button on the turn signal lever.
System limits The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judg ment of when to use the high beams. In sit uation that require this. therefore switch off manually.
The system is not fully functional in the fol lowing situations. and driver intervention may be necessary:
In very unfavorable weather conditions. such as fog or heavy precipitation.
When detecting poorly-lit road users such as pedestrians. cyclists. horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; or at animal crossings.
In tight curves. on hilltops or in depres sions. in crossing traffic or half-ob scured oncoming traffic on highways.
In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the presence of highly reflective signs.
When the windshield in front of the in terior mirror is fogged over. dirty or cov ered with stickers. etc.
Fog lights
Front fog lights
Concept The front fog lights work alongside the low beams to illuminate a wider area of the roadway.
Functional requirement The low beams must be switched on before switching on the front fog lights.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The green indicator light lights up if the front fog lights are switched on.
If the automatic headlight control. refer to page 145. is activated. the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lights.
When the high beams or headlight flasher are activated. the front fog lights are not switched on.
Seite 147
Lights CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Instrument lighting
Functional requirement The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness.
Adjusting
Adjust the brightness with the thumbwheel.
Interior lights
General information Depending on the equipment. the interior lights. footwell lights. entry lights. and cour tesy lights are controlled automatically.
The thumbwheel for the instrument lighting controls brightness of some of these fea tures.
Overview
Interior lights
Reading lights
Ambient light
Switching the interior lights on/off
Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Switching the reading lights on and off manually
Press the button.
The reading lights are located in the front next to the interior light.
Ambient light
General information Depending on the equipment version. light ing can be adjusted for some lights in the car's interior.
Activating/deactivating Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 4. "Interior lighting" 5. "Ambient lighting" 6. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
Changing color
Push the switch forward or back: manual color change.
Press the switch forward or back ward and hold for approx. 3 seconds. until the ambient light illuminates
Seite 148
CONTROLS Lights
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Setting the brightness Depending on the equipment. the bright ness of the ambient light can be adjusted via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on the Control Display.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 4. "Interior lighting" 5. "Brightness" 6. Adjust the brightness.
Seite 149
Lights CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Safety
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available
Airbags
Front airbag. driver
Front airbag. front passenger
Head airbag
Side airbag
Knee airbag
Front airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and the front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone would not provide adequate protection.
Side airbag In the event of a side impact. the side air bag protects the side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Seite 150
CONTROLS Safety
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Head airbag In the event of a side impact. the head air bag protects the head.
Ejection Mitigation The head airbag system is designed as an ejection mitigation countermeasure to re duce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants through side windows during rollovers or side impact events.
Knee airbag The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of a frontal impact.
Protective effect Airbags are not triggered in every impact situation. for instance in less severe acci dents or rear-end collisions.
Information on optimum effect of the airbags
Warning If the seat position is incorrect or the de ployment area of the airbags is impaired. the airbag system cannot provide protec tion as intended and may cause additional injuries due to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Follow the in formation on achieving the optimum pro tective effect of the airbag system.
Keep a distance from the airbags.
Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions. to keep the risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible when the airbag is triggered.
Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly. i.e. keeps his or her
Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag.
There should be no additional persons. animals or objects between an airbag and a person.
Dashboard and windshield on the front passenger side must stay clear - do not attach adhesive labels or coverings and do not attach brackets or cables. for in stance for GPS devices or mobile phones.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag cover panels. do not cover them or modify them in any way.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area.
Do not attach slip covers. seat cushions or other objects to the front passenger seat that are not specifically suited for seats with integrated side airbags.
Do not place seat cushions or other ob jects on the front seats that are not spe cifically suited for seats with integrated side airbags.
Do not hang pieces of clothing. such as jackets. over the backrests.
Never modify either the individual com ponents or the wiring in the airbag sys tem. This also applies to steering wheel covers. the dashboard. and the seats.
Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very closely. injury from contact with the airbags cannot be fully ruled out in certain situa tions.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and. in most cases. temporary hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with dis abilities may affect the air bag system; con
Seite 151
Safety CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Functional readiness of the airbag system
Safety information
Warning Individual components can be hot after triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch individual components.
Warning Improperly executed work can lead to fail ure. malfunction or unintentional trigger ing of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunction. the airbag system might not trigger as intended despite the accident severity. There is a risk of injuries or dan ger to life. Have the airbag system checked. repaired. dismantled and scrap ped by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Correct function
When the ignition is switched on. the warning light in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby indicates the operational readiness of the entire airbag system and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning Warning light does not come on when the ignition is switched on.
The warning light lights up continu ously.
Automatic deactivation of the front-seat passenger airbags
Concept The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the human body's resistance.
Front. knee. and side airbag on the front passenger's side are activated or deacti vated.
General information Before transporting a child on the front pas senger seat. refer to the safety information and instructions for children on the front passenger seat. see Children.
Safety information
Warning To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag function. the system must be able to de tect whether a person is sitting in the front passenger seat. The entire seat cush ion area must be used for this purpose.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.
Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults. the front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated in certain sitting positions.
In this case. the indicator light for the front seat passenger airbags lights up.
In this case. change the sitting position so that the front-seat passenger airbags are ac tivated and the indicator light goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags. have the person sit in the rear.
Seite 152
CONTROLS Safety
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
To enable correct recognition of the occu pied seat cushion. Do not attach covers. cushions. ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically deter mined to be safe for use on the front passenger seat.
Do not place any electronic devices on the front passenger seat if a child re straint system is to be installed on it.
Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below.
No moisture in or on the seat.
Indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags
The indicator light for the front-seat passen ger airbags indicates the operating state of the front-seat passenger airbags.
The light indicates whether the airbags are either activated or deactivated.
The indicator light lights up when a child is properly seated in a child restraint system or when the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not activated.
The indicator light does not light up when. for instance a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front pas senger side are activated.
Detected child restraint systems The system generally detects children seated in a child restraint system. particu larly in child restraint systems required by NHTSA at the point in time when the vehi cle was manufactured. After installing a child restraint system. make sure that the indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child restraint system has been detected and the front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front seat passenger airbag The explosive power that activates driver's/ front-seat passenger airbags very much de pends on the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term. calibrate the front seats as soon as a relevant Check Control mes sage is displayed. A message also appears on the Control Display.
Calibrating the front seats
Warning There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.
An appropriate Check Control message is displayed.
1. Move the respective seat all the way for ward.
2. Move the respective seat forward again.
The seat moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired posi tion.
Seite 153
Safety CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
The calibration procedure is completed when the Check Control message disap pears.
If the message continues to be displayed. repeat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re peat calibration. have the system checked as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Concept The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.
General information Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure and. depending on the model. the tire temperature.
Further information and instructions on us ing the system can also be found under Tire inflation pressure. refer to page 248.
Functional requirements The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise. reliable flagging of a loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured: After a tire or wheel replacement. a re set was performed with the correct tire inflation pressure.
After the tire inflation pressure was ad justed to a new value. a reset was per formed.
Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.
Status display
Current status The system status can be displayed on the Control Display. e.g. whether or not the sys tem is active.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
"Tire Pressure Monitor"
The current status is displayed.
Tire conditions
General information Tire and system status are indicated by the color of the wheels and a SMS text message on the Control Display.
All wheels green System is active and will issue a warning re lated to the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.
One to four yellow wheels A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.
Gray wheels It may not be possible to identify tire infla tion pressure losses.
Possible causes: Malfunction.
The system is being reset.
Additional information The status control display additionally shows the current tire inflation pressures.
The values shown are instantaneous meas urements and may vary depending on driv ing style or weather conditions.
Seite 154
CONTROLS Safety
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Resetting the system Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
"Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the following is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure Monitor…".
After a travel time of several minutes. the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference values. The resetting process is completed automatically while driving.
After successful completion of the reset. the tires appear in green on the Control Display and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label for recommended pressures." is displayed.
You may interrupt this trip at any time.
When you continue the reset resumes auto matically.
Messages
General information A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.
Safety information
Warning A damaged regular tire with low or miss ing tire inflation pressure impacts han dling. such as steering and braking re sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the information
If a tire inflation pressure check is required
Message A symbol with a Check Control message ap pears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
The system has detected a wheel change. but no reset was done.
No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire infla tion pressures stored during the last reset.
Inflation was not carried out ac cording to specifications.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last reset.
Measure 1. Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.
2. Reset the system.
If the tire inflation pressure is too low
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.
In addition. a symbol with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display.
Seite 155
Safety CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Symbol Possible cause
There is a tire inflation pressure loss.
No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire infla tion pressures stored during the last reset.
Measure 1. Reduce your speed and drive moder ately. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity. for instance gas station. check and correct the tire infla tion pressure in all four tires. if neces sary.
3. Reset the system.
If there is a significant loss of tire inflation pressure
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.
In addition. a symbol with the affected tire appears in a Check Control message on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.
No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire infla tion pressures stored during the last reset.
Measure 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering ma neuvers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires. refer to page 259. are la beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.
To do this. check the tire inflation pres sure in all four tires. for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct. the Tire Pressure Moni tor may not have been reset. In this case. perform the reset.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct. the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case. initialize the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not possible. please contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified serv ice center or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire. e.g. with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel.
Use of sealant. for instance from the flat tire kit. may damage the TPM wheel electronics.
In this case. have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity.
Seite 156
CONTROLS Safety
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Run-flat tires
Safety information
Warning The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance. reduced lane stabil ity when braking. braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Maximum speed You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma neuvers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct. the Tire Pressure Moni tor may not have been reset. In this case. perform the reset.
Possible driving range with a depressurized tire The distance for which it may be possible to drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used. e.g. speed. road conditions. external temperature. The driv ing range may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently. potentially leading to conditions such as the following: Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
Longer braking distances.
Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obsta cles. for instance curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise. pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an acci dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
System limits
Temperature The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's temperature.
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire's temperature. thus increasing the tire inflation pressure.
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again.
These circumstances may cause a warning when temperatures fall very sharply.
Sudden tire pressure loss The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstan ces.
Seite 157
Safety CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Failure performing a reset The system does not function properly if a reset has not been carried out. for instance a flat tire is reported though tire inflation pressures are correct.
Malfunction
The yellow warning light flashes and is then illuminated continuously. A Check Control message is displayed.
It may not be possible to identify tire pres sure losses.
Examples and recommendations in the fol lowing situations: A wheel without TPM wheel electronics. for instance an emergency wheel. is mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified serv ice center or repair shop as needed.
Malfunction: have system checked by a dealer’s service center or another quali fied service center or repair shop.
The system was unable to complete the reset. Perform a system reset again.
Interference caused by systems or devi ces with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference. the system automatically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Each tire. including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety
Seite 158
CONTROLS Safety
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
Concept The system detects tire inflation pressure loss on the basis of rotation speed differen ces between the individual wheels while driving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss. the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes.
The difference will be detected and reported as a flat tire.
The system does not measure the actual in flation pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise. reliable flagging of a loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured: After a tire or wheel replacement. an ini tialization was performed with the cor rect tire inflation pressure.
After the tire pressure was adjusted to a new value. an initialization was per formed.
Status display The current status of the flat tire monitor can be displayed. for instance whether the RPA is active.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
"Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization required An initialization must be performed in the following situations:
After the tire inflation pressure has been adjusted.
After a tire or wheel replacement.
Performing initialization When initializing. the set tire inflation pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
"Flat Tire Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driv ing. which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes.
Messages
General information When a flat tire is indicated. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on. if needed.
Safety information
Warning A damaged regular tire with low or miss ing tire inflation pressure impacts han dling. such as steering and braking re sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the information
Seite 159
Safety CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Entering
Opening and closing
Buttons on the vehicle key
Unlocking
Locking
Unlocking the tailgate
Panic mode
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button on the vehicle key.
Depending on the settings. either only the driver's door or all vehicle access points are unlocked.
If only the driver's door is unlocked. press the button on the vehicle key again to un lock the other vehicle access points.
Press and hold the button on the ve hicle key after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are opened. as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.
Locking the vehicle
Press the button on the vehicle key.
All vehicle access points are locked.
Buttons for the central locking system
Overview
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
Pressing the button locks the vehi cle if the front doors are closed.
Unlocking
Pressing the button unlocks the ve hicle.
Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Comfort Access
Concept The vehicle can be accessed without operat ing the vehicle key.
Carrying the vehicle key with you. e.g. in your pants pocket. is sufficient.
Seite 16
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Indication of a flat tire
A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.
In addition. a symbol with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.
Measure 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering ma neuvers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires. refer to page 259. are la beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.
To do this. check the tire inflation pres sure in all four tires. for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct. the Tire Pressure Moni tor may not have been reset. In this case. perform the reset.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct. the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case. initialize the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not possible. please contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified serv ice center or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire. e.g. with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel.
Use of sealant. for instance from the flat tire kit. may damage the TPM wheel electronics.
In this case. have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity.
Run-flat tires
Safety information
Warning The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance. reduced lane stabil ity when braking. braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Maximum speed You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma neuvers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct. the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case. initialize the system.
Seite 160
CONTROLS Safety
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Possible driving range with a depressurized tire The distance for which it may be possible to drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used. e.g. speed. road conditions. external temperature. The driv ing range may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions. the distance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently. potentially leading to conditions such as the following: Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
Longer braking distances.
Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obsta cles. for instance curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise. pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an acci dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
System limits The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations: A natural. even tire inflation pressure loss in all four tires will not be recog nized. Therefore. check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
Sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances cannot be recog nized in advance.
When the system has not been initial ized.
When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface.
Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels. high lateral acceleration (drift ing).
When driving with snow chains.
Intelligent Safety
Concept Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the driver assistance systems.
The intelligent safety systems can help pre vent an imminent collision. Approach control warning with City light braking function. refer to page 162.
Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation. refer to page 166.
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in as sessing visibility and traffic situation.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap propriate.
Seite 161
Safety CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Warning Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judg ment. Due to its limits. the system may not issue warnings or reactions. or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning Due to system limits. individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/ towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Switching on/off Some Intelligent Safety systems are auto matically active after every departure. Some Intelligent Safety systems activate accord ing to the last setting.
Press button briefly: The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.
LED lights up orange or goes out respec tive to their individual settings.
Adjust the settings as needed. The individ ual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Press button again: All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.
The LED lights up green.
Hold down button: All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.
The LED goes out.
Approach control warning with city light braking func tion
Concept The system may prevent some accidents. In the event of an accident. the system may re duce impact speed.
The system sounds a warning before an im minent collision and activates brakes inde pendently. if needed.
The Brake Assistant function activates and applies the brakes with limited force and duration.
A camera at the base of the interior mirror controls the system.
The approach control warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated.
Seite 162
CONTROLS Safety
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
With the vehicle approaching another vehi cle intentionally. the approach control warn ing and braking are delayed in order to avoid false system reactions.
General information The system warns at two levels of an immi nent danger of collision at speeds from ap prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn ings may vary with the current driving situation.
Braking is performed at speeds up to ap proximately 35 mph/60 km/h.
Detection range
Objects that the system can detect are taken into account.
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in as sessing visibility and traffic situation.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap propriate.
Warning Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judg ment. Due to its limits. the system may not issue warnings or reactions. or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning Due to system limits. individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/ towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Seite 163
Safety CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after ev ery driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly: The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.
LED lights up orange or goes out respec tive to their individual settings.
Adjust the settings as needed. The individ ual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Press button again: All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.
The LED lights up green.
Hold down button: All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.
The LED goes out.
Setting the warning time The warning time can be set via the Central Information Display (CID).
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Intelligent Safety" 4. "Warning time" 5. Select the desired setting.
The selected warning time is stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Warning with braking function
Display A warning symbol appears in the instru ment cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi nent.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarn ing.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning.
Brake and make an evasive ma neuver. if necessary.
Prewarning This warning is provided. for instance when there is impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
If a prewarning is provided. respond by braking as warranted.
Seite 164
CONTROLS Safety
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Acute warning with braking function An acute warning is displayed when there is an imminent danger of collision due to the vehicle approaching another object at a high speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning. If necessary. the driver is assisted by a minor automatic braking intervention in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings may be provided even when there has been no prior warning.
Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver to inter vene. During a warning. the maximum brak ing force is used. In order to activate the Brake Assistant function. you must apply the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of collision. the system may assist with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed. the vehicle may come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: during a braking in tervention up to a complete stop. the engine may be shut down.
The driver may interrupt the braking inter vention function by stepping on the acceler ator pedal or by actively moving the steer ing wheel.
The system’s ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Refer to the information in this Owner’s Manual re garding the limitations of the system and actively intervene as warranted.
System limits
Safety information
Warning The system is designed to operate in cer tain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors. the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Ac tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner’s Manual re garding the scope of the system’s opera tion and limitations.
Detection range The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus. a system reaction might not come or might come late.
The following situations may not be de tected. for example: Slow moving vehicles when you ap proach them at high speed.
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you. or sharply decelerating vehicles.
Vehicles with an unusual rear appear ance.
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: In heavy fog. wet conditions. or snow fall.
In tight curves.
If the field of view of the camera or the windshield is dirty or covered.
If the driving stability control systems are deactivated. for instance DSC OFF.
Seite 165
Safety CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button.
During calibration of the camera imme diately after vehicle delivery.
If there are constant blinding effects be cause of oncoming light. for instance from the sun low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity The more sensitive the warning settings are. the more warnings are displayed.
Therefore. there may also be an excess of premature or unjustified warnings and reac tions.
Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation
Concept The system may prevent some accidents with pedestrians.
When driving at city speeds. the system will issue a warning if there is imminent risk of a collision with pedestrians. and sup port this with a light braking function.
The camera at the base of the interior mir ror controls the system.
General information In sufficiently bright conditions. the system issues a warning of a possible risk of colli sion with pedestrians in the speed range from approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx.
35 mph/60 km/h The system reacts to people who are within the detection range of the system.
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is divided into two areas: Central area. arrow 1. directly in front of the vehicle.
Expanded area. arrow 2. to the right and left of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo cated within the central area. A warning is issued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area.
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in as sessing visibility and traffic situation.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap propriate.
Warning Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judg ment. Due to its limits. the system may not issue warnings or reactions. or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
Seite 166
CONTROLS Safety
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Warning Due to system limits. individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/ towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after ev ery driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly: The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.
LED lights up orange or goes out respec tive to their individual settings.
Adjust the settings as needed. The individ ual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Press button again: All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.
The LED lights up green.
Hold down button: All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.
The LED goes out.
Warning with braking function
Display If a collision with a detected person is im minent. a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Dis play.
The red symbol is displayed and a signal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver.
Seite 167
Safety CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver to inter vene. During a warning. the maximum brak ing force is used. In order to activate the Brake Assistant function. you must apply the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of collision. the system may assist with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed. the vehicle may come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: during a braking in tervention up to a complete stop. the engine may be shut down.
The driver may interrupt the braking inter vention function by stepping on the acceler ator pedal or by actively moving the steer ing wheel.
The system’s ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Refer to the information in this Owner’s Manual re garding the limitations of the system and actively intervene as warranted.
System limits
Safety information
Warning The system is designed to operate in cer tain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors. the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Ac tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner’s Manual re garding the scope of the system’s opera tion and limitations.
Detection range The detection potential of the camera is lim ited.
Thus. a warning might not be issued or be issued late.
The following situations may not be de tected. for example: Partially covered pedestrians.
Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of the viewing angle or contour.
Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
Pedestrians having a body size less than 32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situa tions: In heavy fog. wet conditions. or snow fall.
In tight curves.
If the field of view of the camera or the windshield is dirty or covered.
If the driving stability control systems are deactivated. for instance DSC OFF.
Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button.
During calibration of the camera imme diately after vehicle delivery.
If there are constant blinding effects be cause of oncoming light. for instance from the sun low in the sky.
When it is dark outside.
John Cooper Works GP: Manual Speed Limiter
Concept The system can be used to set a speed limit. for instance to prevent the vehicle from ex ceeding speed limits.
Seite 168
CONTROLS Safety
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
General information The system can limit the speed. starting at a value of 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be driven at any speed below the set speed limit.
Exceeding the speed limit When necessary. the speed limit can be in tentionally overcome by stepping on the gas.
When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit. a warning is issued.
No brake intervention If the set speed limit is reached or uninten tionally exceeded. such as when driving downhill. the vehicle is not actively braked.
When the speed limit is set during a trip to a value below the current speed. the vehicle coasts until its speed drops below the set speed limit.
Overview
Steering wheel buttons. left
Button Function
System on/off.
Increase the speed limit.
Reduce the speed limit.
Operation
Switching on
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The current speed is accepted as the speed limit.
If the system is switched on while the vehi cle is stationary or driving at low speeds.
20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit.
The set speed is displayed under the LIMIT or LIM indicator.
When the speed limit is switched on. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on as well. if needed.
Switching off
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The system switches off automatically in the following situations. for example: When shifting into reverse gear.
When the engine is switched off.
When cruise control is switched on.
John Cooper Works GP: when activating GP MODE or deactivating DSC.
The displays go out.
Changing the speed limit
When the speed limit is set during a trip to a value below the current speed. the vehicle coasts until it drops to the set speed limit.
Exceeding the speed limit The speed limit can be exceeded intention ally. There is no acoustic warning in this case.
Seite 169
Safety CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
The vehicle automatically detects the vehi cle key when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior.
Unlocking the vehicle
On the driver's or front passenger's door handle. press the button.
Locking the vehicle
On the driver's or front passenger's door handle. press the button.
Tailgate
Unlock the vehicle and then press the button on the outside of the tailgate.
Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting. the doors may also be unlocked.
Closing Closing the tailgate manually.
Displays and control elements
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
Low beams. fog lights
High beams. headlight flasher. turn sig nal
Instrument cluster
Wiper system
Indicator/warning lights
Instrument cluster The indicator/warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Seite 17
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Press the accelerator pedal all the way down to intentionally exceed the set speed limit.
When the vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit. the limit is automatically reacti vated.
Warning when the speed limit is exceeded
Visual warning If the set speed limit is exceeded. the LIMIT or LIM indicator flashes while the vehicle speed is greater than the speed limit.
Acoustic warning If the speed limit is exceeded uninten tionally. a signal sounds.
When the speed limit is reduced to be low the vehicle speed while driving. a signal sounds after approx. 30 seconds.
When the speed limit is intentionally exceeded by stepping on the accelerator pedal all the way down. there is no sig nal.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: The desired speed is displayed under the LIMIT indicator.
Instrument cluster with en hanced features: The desired speed is displayed under the LIM indicator.
The indicator does not light up: the sys tem is switched off.
The indicator lights up green: the sys tem is active.
Display flashes green: set speed limit ex ceeded.
Displays in the Head-up Display The information from the Speed Limiter can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.
Brake force display
Concept Additional brake lights indicate emergency braking to the traffic behind. This can re duce the risk of a rear-end collision.
General information
During normal brake application. the brake lights light up.
During heavy brake application. the flashers additionally light up.
Fatigue alert
Concept The system can detect decreasing alertness or fatigue of the driver during long. monoto nous trips. for instance on highways. In this situation. it is recommended that the driver takes a break.
Seite 170
CONTROLS Safety
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in as sessing one's physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or fatigue may not be de tected or not be detected in time. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
Function The system is switched on each time the en gine is started and cannot be switched off.
After travel has begun. the system monitors certain aspects of the driver's behavior. so that decreasing alertness or fatigue can be detected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into account: Personal driving style. for instance steering behavior.
Driving conditions. for instance time. length of trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h. the system is active and can display a rec ommendation to take a break.
Break recommendation If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued. a message is displayed in the Control Dis play with the recommendation to take a break.
A recommendation to take a break is dis played only once during an uninterrupted trip.
After a break. another recommendation to take a break cannot be displayed until after approximately 45 minutes.
System limits The function may be limited in the follow ing situations and may issue an incorrect warning or no warning at all: When the clock is set incorrectly.
When the vehicle speed is mainly below about 43 mph/70 km/h.
With a sporty driving style. such as dur ing rapid acceleration or when corner ing fast.
In active driving situations. such as when changing lanes frequently.
When the road surface is poor.
In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes af ter parking the vehicle. for instance in the case of a break during longer trips on high ways.
PostCrash – iBrake
Concept In the event of an accident. the system can bring the vehicle to a halt automatically without intervention by the driver in cer tain situations. This can reduce the risk of a further collision and the consequences thereof.
At standstill After coming to a halt. the brake is released automatically. Secure the vehicle against rolling.
Harder vehicle braking In certain situations. it can be necessary to bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than the Brake Assistant allows.
To do this. quickly apply extra force to the brake. For a brief period. the braking pres sure will be higher than the braking pres
Seite 171
Safety CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Interrupting automatic braking It can be necessary to interrupt automatic braking in certain situations. for instance for an evasive maneuver.
Interrupt automatic braking: By pressing the brake pedal.
By pressing the accelerator pedal.
Seite 172
CONTROLS Safety
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Antilock Braking System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking.
The vehicle maintains its steering power even during full brake applications. which increases the active safety.
ABS is ready when vehicle is ready to drive.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly. this sys tem automatically boosts the vehicle brak ing capability to the furthest possible ex tent. It reduces the braking distance to a minimum during an emergency stop. This system utilizes all of the capabilities pro vided by the Antilock Brake System ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the emergency stop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
Concept Within the physical limits. the system helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels.
General information DSC detects the following unstable driving conditions. for instance: Fishtailing. which can lead to oversteer ing.
Loss of traction of the front wheels. which can lead to understeering.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC. refer to page 174. is a version of the DSC where for ward momentum is optimized.
John Cooper Works GP: GP MODE. refer to page 175. is one of the versions of the DSC that is optimized for forward momentum.
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in as sessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system. it cannot inde pendently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap propriate.
Seite 173
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Warning When driving with a roof load. for in stance with roof-mounted luggage rack. the vehicle's center of gravity is higher. which increases the risk of the vehicle tip ping in critical driving situations. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC Dy namic Stability Control when driving with roof load.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator light flashes: DSC con trols the drive and braking forces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunctioned.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
General information When DSC is deactivated. driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving in curves.
To increase vehicle stability. activate DSC again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold this button but not longer than approx. 10 seconds. un til the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up in the instrument cluster and dis plays DSC OFF.
DSC is switched off.
Activating DSC
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator light go out.
Indicator/warning lights When DSC is deactivated. DSC OFF is dis played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator light lights up: DSC is deactivated.
Automatic activation When DSC is deactivated. automatic activa tion occurs in the following situations: The vehicle has a flat tire.
When activating cruise control in the TRACTION or DSC OFF settings.
John Cooper Works GP: when activating cruise control in the GP MODE or DSC OFF settings.
DTC Dynamic Traction Con trol
Concept DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stabil ity Control where forward momentum is op timized.
The system ensures maximum headway on special road conditions. for instance unp lowed snowy roads or loose road surfaces. but with somewhat limited vehicle stability.
When DTC is activated. the vehicle has maximum traction. Driving stability is lim ited during acceleration and when driving in curves.
Drive carefully.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circum stances: When driving in slush or on uncleared. snow-covered roads.
When driving off from deep snow or loose ground.
Seite 174
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control
Activating DTC
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the in strument cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica tor light go out.
John Cooper Works GP: GP MODE
Concept For the John Cooper Works GP. GP MODE replaces the Dynamic Traction Control DTC.
GP MODE is a mode of the Dynamic Stabil ity Control DSC that has been optimized for driving on racetracks and makes it possible to drive on a dry roads with high longitudi nal and lateral acceleration but with limited vehicle stability. The system does not inter vene with braking interventions on the wheels for stabilization until the absolute limit range is reached.
When the GP MODE is activated. the agility of the vehicle is increased further by a high engine speed.
Activating/deactivating GP MODE
Activating GP MODE
Press the button.
GP MODE is displayed in the instrument cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up. In addition. a Check Control mes sage is displayed.
Deactivating GP MODE
Press the button again.
GP MODE and DSC OFF indicator light go out.
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of the vehicle.
To increase maneuverability. wheels are braked individually when a sporty driving style is used.
Adaptive chassis
Concept The tuning of the suspension can be changed with the system.
The system offers several different pro grams.
The programs are selected via the MINI Driving Modes switch.
Programs
MID/GREEN Balanced tuning of the shock absorbers for more comfort.
SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the shock ab sorbers for greater driving agility.
Seite 175
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
MINI Driving Modes switch
Concept The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to fine-tune the vehicle's settings and features.
Choose between three different programs.
Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch will activate the particular program.
Operating the programs
Switch Program
SPORT MID GREEN
MID MID provides balanced tuning.
With each starting operation. MID is acti vated using the Start/Stop button.
GREEN
Concept GREEN provides consistent tuning to maxi mize range.
Activating GREEN Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward until GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring GREEN
Via MINI Driving Modes switch 1. Activate GREEN.
2. "Configure GREEN" 3. Configure the program.
This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.
Via the Central Information Display (CID)
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary. "Driving mode" 4. "Configure GREEN" 5. Select the desired setting.
This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.
SPORT
Concept Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain for greater driving agility.
Depending on the vehicle equipment. the tuning of the chassis and suspension also changes and SPORT can be individually configured.
The configuration is stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Activating SPORT Press the MINI Driving Modes switch up ward until SPORT is displayed in the instru ment cluster.
Configuring SPORT Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary. "Driving mode" 4. "Configure SPORT" 5. Select the desired setting.
This configuration is retrieved when SPORT is activated.
Seite 176
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Configuring driving program Settings can be made for the following driv ing programs in Driving mode: GREEN. refer to page 176.
SPORT. refer to page 176.
Displays
Program selection
Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch displays a list of programs. which can be se lected.
Selected program
The instrument cluster dis plays the selected program.
Drive-off assistant
Concept This system supports driving off on uphill grades. The parking brake is not required.
Driving off with the drive-off assistant 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off without delay.
After the foot brake is released. the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Servotronic
Servotronic is a speed-dependent power steering function.
The system provides the steering force with more support at low speeds than at higher ones. This makes it easier to park. for in stance. and makes steering firmer when driving at faster speeds.
Furthermore. the steering force adapts ac cording to the driving program. so that a firm. sporty feel or a comfortable steering response is conveyed.
Seite 177
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Camera-based cruise control
Concept Using this system. a desired speed and a distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed on clear roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes automatically.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you. the sys tem adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The speed is adjusted as far as the given situation allows.
The distance can be adjusted in several steps. For safety reasons. it depends on the respective speed.
General information A camera on the interior mirror is used to detect vehicles driving ahead.
Depending on the settings. the characteris tics of cruise control many change in cer tain ranges.
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in as sessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system. it cannot inde pendently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap propriate.
Warning The desired speed can be incorrectly ad justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap propriate.
Warning Risk of accident due to too high speed dif ferences to other vehicles. for instance in the following situations: When fast approaching a slowly mov ing vehicle.
Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.
When fast approaching standing ve hicles.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Watch traffic closely and actively inter vene where appropriate.
Seite 178
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off. refer to page 179.
Store/maintain speed. refer to page 180.
Pause cruise control. refer to page 179.
Continue cruise control with the last setting. refer to page 181.
Reduce distance. refer to page 181.
Increase the distance. refer to page 181.
Increase speed. refer to page 180.
Reduce speed. refer to page 180.
Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's series. optional features and country speci fications.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.
Functional requirements
Speed range The system is best used on well-constructed roads.
The system is functional at speeds begin ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
The max. speed that can be set is 85 mph/140 km/h.
Active cruise control is paused below ap prox. 20 mph/30 km/h. The system does not brake to a stop.
Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control
Switching on
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: Display in the instrument cluster lights up.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: Display in the instrument cluster lights up. The current speed is adopted as desired speed and displayed with symbol.
Instrument cluster with en hanced features: Display in the instrument cluster lights up. The current speed is adopted as desired speed and displayed with symbol.
Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on. if necessary.
Seite 179
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Driver's door For 3-door models:
Power windows
Exterior mirrors
For 5-door models:
Safety switch
Power windows
Exterior mirrors
All around the selector lever
Selector lever
Controller with buttons
Parking brake
Central Information Display (CID)
Concept The Central Information Display (CID) com bines the functions of a multitude of switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: calls up the main menu.
Press twice: open recently used menus.
Opens the Communication menu.
Opens the Media/Radio menu.
Opens destination input menu for navigation.
Opens navigation map.
Opens the previous display.
Opens the Options menu.
Voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
Press the button on the steering wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol indicates that the voice ac tivation system is active.
Seite 18
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Switching off
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.
Interrupting manually
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Interrupting automatically The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: When the driver applies the brakes.
Manual transmission: when the clutch pedal is depressed for a few seconds or released while a gear is not engaged.
If selector lever position N is set.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
John Cooper Works GP: when GP MODE is activated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter venes.
If the detection range of the camera is impaired. for instance by soiling. heavy precipitation or glare effects from the sun.
If the vehicle in front decelerates below a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed Press
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: The stored speed is displayed by the symbol in the Info Display of the instrument cluster.
Instrument cluster with en hanced features: The stored speed is displayed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on. if necessary.
The speed can also be stored as follows:
Press the button.
Changing the speed
Seite 180
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Adjusting the distance
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system limits. braking can be late.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Be aware to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the distance to the traffic and weather conditions and maintain the prescribed safety distance. possibly by braking.
Reduce distance
Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the Info Display of the in strument cluster.
Increase the distance
Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the Info Display of the in strument cluster.
Continuing cruise control
General information An interrupted cruise control can be contin ued by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between cur rent speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Other wise. unintentional braking or accelerating may occur.
In the following cases. the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again: When the system is switched off.
When the ignition is switched off.
Calling up the stored speed and distance
Press the button with the system in terrupted. Cruise control is contin ued with the stored values. The in strument cluster briefly displays the selected distance.
Switching distance control on/off
Safety information
Warning The system does not react to traffic driv ing ahead of you. but instead maintains the stored speed. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Ad just the desired speed to the traffic condi tions and brake as needed.
Switching distance control off Distance control can be switched off and on when driving with cruise control activated.
Press and hold this button.
Press and hold this button.
Seite 181
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
The indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up.
To switch distance control back on. press one of the two buttons again briefly.
After changing over distance control. a Check Control message is displayed.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Desired speed and stored speed
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: In addition to the indicator light. the desired speed is displayed in the Info Dis play. Display lights up green: system is active. the display indicates the desired speed.
Display lights up orange: system is in terrupted. the display indicates the stored speed.
No display: system is switched off.
Instrument cluster with en hanced features: Display lights up green: system is active. the dis play indicates the desired speed.
Speed value is illuminated gray: system is interrupted.
No display: system is switched off.
If no speed is indicated. it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not currently fulfilled.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Distance display
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4 This value is set automatically af ter the system is switched on.
Instrument clusters without enhanced fea tures: selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand portion of the Info Display.
Detected vehicle
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: Symbol lights up orange: a vehicle has been detected ahead of you.
Instrument cluster with en hanced features: Vehicle symbol is displayed: a vehicle has been detected ahead of you.
Indicator/warning lights
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: Symbol flashes orange.
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: Vehicle symbol flashes.
Seite 182
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
The conditions are not adequate for the sys tem to work.
The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
Symbol flashes red and a signal sounds: Brake and make an evasive maneu ver. if necessary.
System interrupted without detected vehicle.
System interrupted with detected ve hicle.
Displays in the Head-up Display The information from Active Cruise Control can also be displayed in the Head-up Dis play.
System limits
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be detected.
Deceleration The system does not decelerate in the fol lowing situations:
For pedestrians. cyclists or similarly slow-moving road users.
For red traffic lights.
For cross traffic.
For oncoming traffic.
Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonwork ing lighting at night.
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not de tected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane. the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected distance. It may not be possible to restore the selected distance in certain situations. including if you are driving significantly faster than vehicles driving ahead of you. for instance when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected. the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers. if needed.
Seite 183
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Cornering
When the desired speed is too high for a curve. the speed is reduced slightly. Be cause curves may not be anticipated in ad vance. drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.
The system has a limited detection range.
Situations can arise in tight curves where a vehicle driving ahead will not be detected or will be detected very late.
When you approach a curve the system may briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. If the system de celerates you may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After releasing the accelerator pedal the system is reactivated and controls speed independently.
Weather The following restrictions can occur under unfavorable weather or light conditions: Poorer vehicle recognition.
Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already recognized.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light conditions: Wet conditions.
Snowfall.
Slush.
Fog.
Glare.
Drive attentively. and react to the current traffic situation. If necessary. intervene ac tively. for instance by braking. steering or evading.
Engine power The desired speed may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insuffi cient.
Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails or was automatically deacti vated.
The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: When an object was not correctly de tected.
In heavy fog. wet conditions. or snow fall.
In tight curves.
If the field of view of the camera or the windshield is dirty or covered.
When driving toward bright lights.
Up to 20 seconds after the start of the engine. via the Start/Stop button.
During calibration of the camera imme diately after vehicle delivery.
Seite 184
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Cruise control
Concept Using this system. a desired speed can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel. The system maintains the desired speed. The system accelerates and brakes automatically as needed.
General information The system is functional at speeds begin ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Depending on the settings. the cruise con trol settings many change under certain conditions.
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in as sessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system. it cannot inde pendently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap propriate.
Warning The use of the system can lead to an in creased risk of accidents in the following situations. for instance: On winding roads.
In heavy traffic.
On slippery roads. in fog. snow. or wet conditions. or on a loose road surface.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Only use the system if driving at constant speed is possible.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off. refer to page 185.
Store speed. refer to page 186.
Pause cruise control. refer to page 185.
Continue cruise control with the last setting. refer to page 187.
Increase speed. refer to page 186.
Reduce speed. refer to page 186.
Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control
Switching on
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: The indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: The current speed is adopted as the desired speed and is displayed with the symbol in the instrument cluster.
Seite 185
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Instrument cluster with en hanced features: Display in the instrument cluster lights up. The current speed is adopted as the speed limit.
Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on. if necessary.
Switching off
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active. press the button on the steering wheel.
Interrupting automatically The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: When the driver applies the brakes.
If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few seconds or released while a gear is not engaged.
If the gear engaged is too high for the current speed.
If selector lever position N is set.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
John Cooper Works GP: when GP MODE is activated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter venes.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed Press
Press the button.
Changing the speed
Seite 186
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Continuing cruise control
General information An interrupted cruise control can be contin ued by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between cur rent speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Other wise. unintentional braking or accelerating may occur.
Calling up the stored speed
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The stored speed is reached again and main tained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator light
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: Depending on how the vehicle is equipped. the indicator light in the instru ment cluster indicates whether the system is switched on.
Instrument cluster with en hanced features: The indicator in the instru ment cluster lights up: the sys tem is switched on.
Desired speed and stored speed
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: The desired speed is displayed to gether with the symbol. Display lights up green: system is active. the display indicates the desired speed.
Display lights up orange: system is in terrupted. the display indicates the stored speed.
No display: system is switched off.
Instrument cluster with en hanced features: The desired speed is displayed together with the symbol. Display lights up green: system is active. the dis play indicates the desired speed.
Display lights up gray: system is inter rupted. the display indicates the stored speed.
No display: system is switched off.
Instrument cluster without enhanced fea tures: If no speed is indicated. it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not currently fulfilled.
System limits
Engine power The desired speed is also maintained down hill. but may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insufficient.
PDC Park Distance Control
Concept PDC is a support when parking. The system detects objects behind the vehicle. If the ve hicle is equipped with front PDC. objects in front of the vehicle are detected too. Ob jects that you are approaching slowly are in dicated by signal tones and a visual display.
Seite 187
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
General information The ultrasound sensors for measuring the distances are located in the bumpers.
The delete range. depending on obstacles and environmental conditions. is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given in the fol lowing situations: By the front middle sensors and the two corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the object.
By the rear middle sensors at ap prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.
When a collision is imminent.
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in as sessing the traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehi cle surroundings closely and actively in tervene where appropriate.
Warning Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis tance Control is activated. the warning can be delayed due to physical circumstances.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control is not yet active.
Overview
With front PDC: button in vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC. for instance in the bump ers.
Functional requirements Ensure full functionality: Do not cover sensors. for instance with stickers. bicycle racks or similar.
Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically The system switches on automatically in the following situations: If selector lever position R is engaged when the engine is running.
The rearview camera also switches on.
With front PDC: when obstacles are de tected behind or in front of the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower than ap prox. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.
Seite 188
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
With front PDC: automatic activation on ob stacle detection can be switched off. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Parking" 4. "Automatic PDC activation": depending on the vehicle equipment.
5. "Automatic PDC activation" The setting is stored for the driver pro file currently used.
Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on. if needed.
With front PDC: switching on/off manually
Press the park assistance button.
On: the LED lights up.
Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the park assistance button.
Depending on the equipment version. the system cannot be switched off manually if the reverse gear is engaged.
Warning
Signal tones An intermittent tone indicates when the ve hicle is approaching an object. E.g. when an object is detected to the left rear of the ve hicle. a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object. the shorter the intervals.
When the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 inches/25 cm. a contin uous tone is sounded.
With front PDC: when objects are simulta neously located both in front of and behind the vehicle. an alternating continuous sig nal is sounded.
The signal tone is switched off. when selec tor lever position P is engaged on vehicles with Steptronic transmission.
Volume The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the entertainment volume can be adjusted.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Tone" 4. "Volume settings" 5. "PDC" 6. Set the desired value.
The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.
Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are already displayed on the Control Display before a signal sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in colors: red. green and yellow.
When the image of the rearview camera is displayed. the switch can be made to PDC:
"Rear view camera"
Seite 189
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
If no other commands are available. operate the function via the Central Information Display (CID).
Terminating the voice activation system
Press the button on the steering wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Seite 19
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
System limits
Safety information
Warning The system is designed to operate in cer tain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors. the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Ac tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner’s Manual re garding the scope of the system’s opera tion and limitations.
With rear luggage rack or when the trailer power socket is in use The rear PDC functions are switched off.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects with ultrasonic measurements can run into physical limits. for instance under the following conditions: For small children and animals.
For persons with certain clothing. for in stance coats.
With external interference of the ultra sound. for instance from passing vehi cles or loud machines.
When sensors are dirty. iced over. dam aged or out of position.
If cargo protrudes.
Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity. wet condi tions. snowfall. extreme heat. or strong wind.
With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.
With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
With moving objects.
With elevated. protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.
With objects with corners and sharp edges.
With objects with a fine surface struc ture such as fences.
For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed. for in stance curbs. can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a con tinuous tone sounds.
False warnings The system may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range: In heavy rain.
When sensors are very dirty or covered with ice.
When sensors are covered in snow.
On rough road surfaces.
On uneven surfaces. such as speed bumps.
In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls. for instance in under ground garages.
In automatic vehicle washes.
Due to heavy exhaust.
Due to other ultrasound sources. for in stance sweeping machines. high pres sure steam cleaners or neon lights.
The malfunction is signaled by a contin uous tone alternating between the front and rear speakers. As soon as the mal function due to other ultrasound sources is no longer present. the system is again fully functional.
With front PDC: to reduce false alarms. switch off automatic PDC activation on ob
Seite 190
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Red symbol is displayed. and the range of the sensors is dimmed on the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Rearview camera
Concept The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in as sessing the traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehi cle surroundings closely and actively in tervene where appropriate.
Overview
Depending on the vehicle equipment: button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the tailgate.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
If necessary. clean the camera lens.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically The system is switched on automatically if selector lever position R is engaged when the engine is running.
Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.
Seite 191
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Switch the system back on. if needed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment: switching on/off manually
Press the park assistance button.
On: the LED lights up.
Off: the LED goes out.
The parking assistance functions are shown on the Control Display.
Switching the view via the Central Information Display (CID) If the rearview camera view is not dis played. change the view via the Central In formation Display (CID):
"Rear view camera" The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirements The rearview camera is switched on.
The tailgate is fully closed.
Keep the recording range of the camera clear.
Protruding cargo or carrier systems that are not connected to a trailer power socket can lead to malfunctions.
Activating assistance functions More than one assistance function can be active at the same time.
The zoom function for trailer operation can only be activated separately. Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines" Lanes and turning radius lines are indi cated.
Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking" Obstacles are marked. depending on the vehicle equipment.
Trailer hitch
"Trailer hitch - zoom" A zoomed image of the trailer hitch is shown.
Pathway lines
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneu vering on level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steer ing angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements.
Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera.
Turning radius lines show the course of the smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
Seite 192
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Only one turning radius line is displayed af ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer tain angle.
Obstacle marking
Depending on the vehicle equipment. obsta cle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark ings match the markings of the PDC Park Distance Control.
Zoom on trailer hitch To make it easier to attach a trailer. you can zoom in on the view of the trailer hitch.
Two static circle segments show the dis tance between the trailer and the trailer hitch.
A docking line dependent on the steering angle helps with aiming for the trailer with the trailer hitch.
The zoom function can be activated when the camera is switched on.
When zooming in. remember that the view may no longer show certain obstacles.
If necessary. the zoom function can also be activated when a rear luggage rack is used.
Parking using pathway and turning radius lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning radius lines lead to within the limits of the parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the cor responding turning radius line.
Display settings
Brightness With the rearview camera switched on:
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set ting is reached and press the Controller.
Seite 193
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Contrast With the rearview camera switched on:
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set ting is reached and press the Controller.
System limits
Detection of objects Very low obstacles or high. protruding ob jects such as ledges may not be recognized by the system.
Depending on the vehicle equipment. some assistance functions also consider data from the PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Control chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Dis play may be closer than they appear. There fore. do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display.
Parking assistant
Concept
This system assists the driver in parking parallel to the road.
General information Parking assistant handling is divided into three steps:
Switching on and activating.
Parking space search.
Parking.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best possible parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure.
System status and instructions on required actions are displayed on the Control Dis play.
A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control.
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in as sessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system. it cannot inde pendently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap propriate.
Warning If the trailer hitch is used. the driver assis tance system can cause damage due to covered sensors. There may be a risk of ac cident or risk of damage to property. The driver assistance system should not be used during trailer towing or if the trailer hitch is used. for instance bicycle rack.
Seite 194
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
NOTICE The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of dam age to property. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.
The safety information of the PDC Park Dis tance Control applies in addition.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
The ultrasound sensors for measuring park ing spaces are located on the wheel hous ing.
Functional requirements
Ultrasound sensors Ensure full functionality: Do not cover sensors. for instance with stickers.
Keep the sensors clean and unob structed.
For measuring parking spaces Maximum speed while driving forward approx. 22 mph/35 km/h.
Maximum distance to row of parked ve hicles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space Gaps behind an object that has a min. length of 5 ft/1.5 m.
Gap between two objects with a mini mum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Min. length of gap between two objects: your vehicle's length plus approx.
3.3 ft/1.0 m.
Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
For parking Doors and tailgate are closed.
The parking brake is released.
When parking in parking spaces on the driver's side. the corresponding turn sig nal must be switched on.
Switching on and activating
Switching on with the button
Press the park assistance button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.
Seite 195
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Parking assistant is activated automati cally.
Switching on with reverse gear Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.
To activate:
"Parking Assistant"
Display on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not availa ble.
White: the system is available but not activated.
The system is activated.
Parking space search and system status
Symbol P on the vehicle image: the park ing assistant is activated and the park ing space search is active.
Control Display shows suitable parking spaces at the edge of the road next to the vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant is active. suitable parking spaces are highlighted.
The parking procedure is active. The system takes over the steering.
Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight. even if the system is deactivated. When the system is deacti vated. the displays on the Control Dis play are shown in gray.
Parking using the parking assistant
Parking
Press the park assistance button or shift into reverse gear to switch on the parking assistant. refer to page 195. Ac tivate the parking assistant. if needed.
Parking assistant is activated.
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search and possible parking spaces are dis played on the display. refer to page 196.
3. Follow the instructions on the display.
The best possible parking position will come after gear change on the station ary vehicle - wait for the automatic steering wheel move.
The end of the parking procedure is in dicated on the display.
4. Adjust the parking position yourself. if needed.
Interrupting manually The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time: Press the park assistance button.
Seite 196
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
"Parking Assistant"
Interrupting automatically The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations: If the driver grasps the steering wheel or takes over steering.
If a gear is selected that does not match the instruction on the display.
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road surfaces.
If a maximum number of parking at tempts or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
If the PDC Park Distance Control dis plays clearances that are too small.
When switching into other functions of the radio.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Resuming An interrupted parking procedure can be continued. if needed.
Reactivate the parking assistant. refer to page 195. and follow the instructions on the display.
Switching off The system can be switched off as follows: Press the park assistance button.
Switching off the ignition.
System limits
Safety information
Warning The system is designed to operate in cer tain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors. the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Ac tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner’s Manual re garding the scope of the system’s opera tion and limitations.
No parking assistance The parking assistant does not offer assis tance in the following situations: In tight curves.
With mounted rear luggage rack.
Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads.
On slippery ground.
With accumulations of leaves/snow in the parking space.
With a mounted emergency wheel.
With ditches or edges. for instance an edge of a port.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects with ultrasonic measurements can run into physical limits. for instance under the following conditions: For small children and animals.
For persons with certain clothing. for in stance coats.
Seite 197
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
With external interference of the ultra sound. for instance from passing vehi cles or loud machines.
When sensors are dirty. iced over. dam aged or out of position.
If cargo protrudes.
Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity. wet condi tions. snowfall. extreme heat. or strong wind.
With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.
With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
With moving objects.
With elevated. protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.
With objects with corners and sharp edges.
With objects with a fine surface struc ture such as fences.
For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed. for in stance curbs. can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a con tinuous tone sounds.
The parking assistant may identify park ing spaces that are not suitable for park ing.
Tire size The parking position may vary depending on the tire size.
Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the sys tem checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 198
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Climate control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Interior air quality
The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the following components:
Emission tested passenger compart ment.
Microfilter.
Air conditioning system to control the temperature. air flow and recirculated air mode.
Depending on the equipment specification: Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Automatic climate control.
Parked-car ventilation.
Seite 199
Climate control CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Set-up and use
Seats. mirrors. and steering wheel
Manually adjustable seats
Forward/backward
Thigh support
Height
Backrest tilt
Adjusting the head restraint
Height
To raise: push the head restraint up.
To lower: press the button. arrow 1. and push the head restraint down.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Adjusting
Selecting a mirror. Automatic Curb Mon itor
Folding in and out
Adjusting the steering wheel
In four directions
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer red height and angle to suit your seating position.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Seite 20
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Air conditioner
Air distribution settings
Air flow
Temperature
Seat heating. right 84
Air conditioning
Recirculated-air mode
Rear window defroster
Windshield defroster
Seat heating. left 84
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on Set any air flow.
Switching off
Turn the wheel for air flow all the way to the left.
Temperature
Concept The system heats or cools. depending on the set temperature.
Adjusting
Turn the wheel to set the de sired temperature.
Seite 200
CONTROLS Climate control
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Air conditioning
Concept The air in the car's interior will be cooled and dehumidified and. depending on the temperature setting. warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the engine running.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with air con ditioning switched on.
Depending on the weather. the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The air conditioner produces condensation water. refer to page 233. that will exit from below the vehicle.
Recirculated-air mode
Concept You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu tants in the immediate environment by tem porarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.
Operation
Press the button: The LED is illuminated when recir culated-air mode is switched on. The supply of outside air is shut off.
When recirculated-air mode is switched off. fresh air is directed into the vehicle's inte rior.
To prevent window condensation. recircu lated-air mode switches off automatically af ter a certain amount of time. depending on the external temperature.
With constant recirculated-air mode. the air quality in the car's interior deteriorates and window fogging increases.
If the windows fog over. switch off recircu lated-air mode and increase the air flow. if needed.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept The air flow for climate control can be ad justed manually.
Operation
Turn the ring to set the de sired air flow.
The higher the air flow. the more effective the heating or cooling will be.
The air flow from the air conditioner may be reduced automatically to save battery power.
Controlling the air distribution manually
Concept The air distribution for climate control can be adjusted manually.
Operation
Turn the wheel to select the desired program or the desired intermediate setting.
Windows.
Upper body region.
Floor area.
Windows. upper body region. and floor area.
Seite 201
Climate control CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
To defrost windows and remove condensation Make the following settings to defrost the windows and remove condensation: Direct the air distribution onto the win dows.
Increasing the air flow.
Increase the temperature.
Switch on the air conditioning if needed.
Windshield defroster
Press the button. The LED lights up.
The front window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.
Rear window defroster
Press the button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.
When GREEN Mode is activated. the heat ing output is reduced.
Microfilter In external and recirculated-air mode. the microfilter filters dust and pollen from the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle maintenance. refer to page 281.
Automatic climate control
Temperature. left
Display
Air flow. AUTO intensity
AUTO program
Air distribution. manual
Display
Temperature. right
Seat heating. right 84
Seite 202
CONTROLS Climate control
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Maximum cooling
10 Air conditioning 11 Recirculated-air mode 12 Rear window defroster
13 Windshield defroster 14 To defrost windows and remove conden sation
15 Seat heating. left 84
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on Set any air flow.
Switching off
Turn wheel for air flow to the left until the control switches off.
Temperature
Concept The automatic climate control achieves the set temperature as quickly as possible. if necessary by using the maximum cooling or heating power. and then keeps it constant.
Adjusting
Turn the wheel to set the de sired temperature.
Do not rapidly switch between different temperature settings. The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to ad just the set temperature.
Air conditioning
Concept The air in the car's interior will be cooled and dehumidified and. depending on the temperature setting. warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the engine running.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with air con ditioning switched on.
Depending on the weather. the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on auto matically with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control. condensation water. refer to page 233. de velops and drains underneath the vehicle.
This is normal.
Maximum cooling
Concept The system is set to the lowest temperature. maximum air flow and recirculated-air mode.
General information The function is available with external tem peratures beyond approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the engine running.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body region. The vents need to be open for this.
Seite 203
Climate control CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
The air flow can be adjusted with the pro gram active.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the system switched on.
AUTO program
Concept The AUTO program cools. ventilates or heats the car's interior automatically.
The air distribution and temperature are controlled automatically depending on the temperature in the car's interior and the de sired temperature setting including the se lected intensity of the air flow.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO program switched on.
Depending on the selected temperature.
AUTO intensity and outside influences. the air is directed to the windshield. side win dows. upper body. and into the floor area.
Point the side vents toward the side win dows.
The following features are switched on au tomatically with the AUTO program: The air conditioning. refer to page 203.
To switch off the program: press the button again or manually adjust the air distribu tion.
Intensity With the AUTO program activated. the au tomatic intensity control can be changed.
Turn the ring to set the de sired intensity from soft to in tensive.
The set intensity is displayed via the posi tion of the illuminated LED segment.
Recirculated-air mode
Concept You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu tants in the immediate environment by tem porarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.
Operation
Press the button: The LED is illuminated when recir culated-air mode is switched on. The supply of outside air is shut off.
When recirculated-air mode is switched off. fresh air is directed into the vehicle's inte rior.
To prevent window condensation. recircu lated-air mode switches off automatically af ter a certain amount of time. depending on the external temperature.
With constant recirculated-air mode. the air quality in the car's interior deteriorates and window fogging increases.
If the windows fog over. switch off recircu lated-air mode and increase the air flow. if needed.
Adjusting the air flow manually
Concept The air flow for climate control can be ad justed manually.
Seite 204
CONTROLS Climate control
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
General information To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO program first.
Operation
Turn the ring to set the de sired air flow.
The manually adjusted air flow is displayed via illuminated LED segments.
The air flow of the automatic climate con trol may be reduced automatically to save battery power.
Adjusting the air distribution manually
Concept The air distribution for climate control can be adjusted manually.
Operation
Press the button repeatedly to se lect a program:
Windows. upper body region. and floor area.
Upper body region and floor area.
Floor area.
Windows and floor area.
Windows.
Windows and upper body region.
Upper body region.
To defrost windows and remove condensation
Concept Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side win dows.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the system switched on.
The air flow can be adjusted with the pro gram active.
If there is window condensation. switch on the air conditioning too.
Windshield defroster
Press the button. The LED lights up.
The front window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.
Rear window defroster
Press the button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.
When GREEN Mode is activated. the heat ing output is reduced.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter In external and recirculated-air mode. the microfilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust. pollen. and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle maintenance. refer to page 281.
Seite 205
Climate control CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Ventilation
Setting The air flow directions can be individually adjusted: Direct ventilation: The air flow is directly pointed onto the person. The air flow heats or cools no ticeably. depending on the adjusted tem perature.
Indirect ventilation: If the vents are fully or partly closed. the air is directly routed into the car's inte rior.
Front ventilation
Turn knob for continuous opening and closing of the vents.
Swivel the vents to alter the direction of the vent flow. arrows.
Parked-car ventilation
Concept The parked-car ventilation ventilates the car's interior and lowers its temperature. if needed.
General information The parked-car ventilation can be switched on and off directly or by using two preset
Functional requirements Direct operation: vehicle is in radio ready state.
Direct operation or preset activation time: does not depend on external tem perature.
Battery is sufficiently charged.
If parked-car ventilation is switched on. the vehicle battery will be discharged.
Thus. limit the maximum activation time to save the vehicle battery. The system will be available again after the engine is started or after a short trip.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary. "Climate functions" 4. "Activate comfort ventilation now"
The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting the activation time Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary. "Climate functions" 4. "Comfort ventilation"
Seite 206
CONTROLS Climate control
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
5. Select the desired activation time.
6. Set the desired time.
Activating the activation time Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary. "Climate functions" 4. "For start time at:" Activate the desired activation time.
The symbol on the automatic climate control lights up when the activation time is activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes when the system has been switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that. it needs to be reactivated.
Seite 207
Climate control CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Integrated Universal Remote Control
Concept The integrated Universal Remote Control in the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func tions of remote-controlled systems such as garage door drives. barriers. or lighting sys tems.
General information The Integrated Universal Remote Control replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans mitters. To operate the remote control. the buttons on the interior mirror must be pro grammed with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular sys tem is required in order to program the re mote control.
Before selling the vehicle. delete the stored functions for the sake of security.
If possible. do not install the antenna of the remote-controlled system. e.g. the garage door drive. near metal objects to ensure the best possible operation.
Safety information
Warning The operation of remote-controlled sys tems with the integrated universal remote control. such as the garage door. may re sult in injury. for example. body parts be coming jammed in a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop erty. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information of the hand-held transmitter.
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the pack aging or in the owner's manual of the system to be controlled. the system is generally compatible with the integrated Universal Remote Control.
Additional questions are answered by: A dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen tex Corporation.
Seite 208
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Overview
Programmable keys
Hand-held transmitters of the system
Programming
General information The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be fully charged at the time of pro gramming to ensure an optimal range of the integrated universal remote control.
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup: Press and hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for approximately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green rapidly. This erases all pro gramming of the buttons on the interior mirror.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be programmed. The LED on the interior mirror will slowly begin flashing orange.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons on the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the hand held transmitter was interrupted. hold
6. – The LED lights up green: program ming completed.
Release the button.
The LED flashes fast: programming is not complete.
Press the button on the interior mir ror for 2 seconds and release. Per form this procedure three times to complete the programming proce dure.
If the integrated universal remote control remains nonoperational. con tinue with the special features for change code wireless systems.
LED does not flash green after 60 seconds: programming not com pleted.
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
To program other functions on other but tons. repeat steps 3 to 5.
Special feature of the rolling code wireless system If you are unable to operate the system af ter repeated programming. please check if the system to be controlled features a roll ing code radio system.
Refer to the owner's manual for the system.
For systems with a rolling code radio sys tem. the integrated Universal Remote Con trol and the system also have to be synchronized.
Please read the owner's manual to find out how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second person.
Seite 209
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Entering the rear 1. Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold backrest forward.
3. Push the seat forward.
Original position 1. Push the seat back into the original po sition.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
Infotainment
Radio
Control elements
Changing the waveband
Changing the entertainment source
Sound output on/off. volume
Changing the station/track
Programmable memory buttons
Navigation destination entry
Entering a destination via address
State/province
"Navigation"
"Enter address"
3. "State/Province?" 4. Select the country from the list.
Entering the address The address can be entered in any order.
Example: entering the address via the town/ city
1. "City/Postal code?" 2. Enter the town/city.
The list is narrowed down further with each entry.
Select the symbol.
4. Select a town/city from the list.
5. If necessary. enter the street.
6. Select the street as you would the town/ city.
7. If necessary. enter a house number.
Select the symbol.
9. Select a house number or range of house numbers from the list.
Starting destination guidance "Start guidance" If only the town/city was entered: destina tion guidance is started to the town/city center.
Pairing the mobile phone After the mobile phone is paired once with the vehicle. the mobile phone can be oper ated using the Central Information Display
Seite 21
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Synchronizing the universal remote control with the system:
1. Park the vehicle within range of the re mote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the inte rior mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing but ton on the system being programmed. e.g. at the garage gate. You have approx.
30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it. If neces sary. repeat this step up to three times in order to finish synchronization. Once synchronization is complete. the pro grammed function will be carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons 1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror but ton to be programmed.
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mir ror flashes orange after approx. 20 sec onds. release the button.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons on the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the hand held transmitter was interrupted. hold down the interior mirror button and re peatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6. The LED can light up in different ways.
The LED lights up green: the pro gramming procedure is completed.
Release the button.
The LED flashes fast: the hand-held transmitter was detected but pro gramming is not complete.
Press the button on the interior mir ror for 2 seconds and release. Per form this procedure three times to complete the programming proce dure.
If the integrated universal remote control remains nonoperational. con tinue with the special features for change code wireless systems.
LED does not flash green after 60 seconds: programming not com pleted.
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
If the programming procedure is not com pleted. the previous programming will re main unchanged.
Operation
Warning The operation of remote-controlled sys tems with the integrated universal remote control. such as the garage door. may re sult in injury. for example. body parts be coming jammed in a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop erty. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information of the hand-held transmitter.
The system. such as the garage door. can be operated using the button on the interior mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition is started. To do this. hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The interior mirror LED stays lit while the wire less signal is being transmitted.
Seite 210
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Deleting stored functions All stored functions will be deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually.
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi mately 10 seconds until the LED on the in terior mirror flashes green rapidly.
Digital compass
Overview
Control button
Mirror display
Mirror display The compass shows the current driving di rection.
Operating concept Various functions can be called up by press ing the control button with a pointed object. such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. The following setting options are displayed in succession. depending on how long the control button is pressed: Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering setting.
12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Setting the compass zones Sets the particular compass zones on the ve hicle so that the compass operates correctly; refer to World map with compass zones.
Seite 211
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure 1. Press and hold the control button for ap prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set compass zone appears in the mirror.
2. To change the zone setting. press the control button quickly and repeatedly until the number of the compass zone that corresponds with your location ap pears in the mirror.
The set zone is stored automatically. The compass is ready for use again after approx imately 10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass The digital compass must be calibrated in the event of the following: The wrong compass point is displayed.
The point of the compass displayed does not change despite changing the direc tion of travel.
Not all points of the compass are dis played.
Procedure 1. Make sure that there are no large metal lic objects or overhead power lines near the vehicle and that there is sufficient room to drive around in a circle.
2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
3. Press and hold the control button for ap prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the display. Next. drive in a complete circle at least once at a speed of no more than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc cessful. the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass.
Left/right-hand steering The digital compass is already set for right or left-hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language Press and hold the control button for ap prox. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the
Seite 212
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Sun visor
Glare shield To provide protection against glare. fold the sun visor down or pivot it to the side.
Vanity mirror A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind a cover.
When the cover is opened. the mirror light ing switches on.
Front passenger side dash board
Decorative trim
Customized decorative trim panels for the dashboard on the front passenger side are available as original MINI accessories de pending on the equipment specification.
Follow the assembly instructions.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Overview
The ashtray is located in one of the frontal cup holders. the cigarette lighter above it in the center console.
Ashtray In order to empty the ashtray. remove the ashtray from the cup holder.
Cigarette lighter
Safety information
Warning Contact with the hot heating element or the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns. Flammable materials can ig nite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is held against the objects. There is a risk of fire and injuries. There is a risk of damage to property. Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle. Make sure that chil dren do not use the cigarette lighter.
Seite 213
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
NOTICE If metal objects fall into the socket. they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.
Operation
Push in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.
Sockets
Concept The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the ignition is switched on or the engine is running.
General information The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non compatible connectors.
Safety information
Warning Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the airbags. such as portable navigation devices. can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be thrown around in the car's in terior during unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that devices and cables are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.
NOTICE Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents. which means that the 12 volt on-board network can be overloaded or damaged.
There is a risk of damage to property. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment.
NOTICE If metal objects fall into the socket. they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.
In the center console
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
Seite 214
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
In the cargo area
The socket is located on the right side in the cargo area.
USB port
General information Follow the information regarding the con nection of mobile devices to the USB port in the section on USB connections. refer to page 55.
In the center console
Depending on the equipment version. a USB port Type A or a USB port Type A and a USB port Type C are located in the front of the center console.
Properties of upper USB port: USB port Type A.
For charging mobile devices and for data transfer.
Charge current: max. 1.5 A.
Properties of lower USB port: USB port Type C.
For charging mobile devices and for data transfer.
Charge current: max. 3 A.
Wireless charging tray
Concept The wireless charging tray enables the fol lowing functions to be performed without cables: Charging the rechargeable battery of a mobile phone with Qi capability and of other mobile devices. which support the Qi standard.
Connect the mobile phone to the exter nal antenna.
Depending on the country. this provides for better network reception and a con sistent reproduction quality.
General information When inserting the mobile phone. make sure there are no objects between it and the wireless charging tray.
During charging. the surface of the tray and the mobile phone may become warm.
Higher temperatures may lead to a reduc tion in the charge current through the mo bile phone. and in isolated cases the charg ing process is paused temporarily. Follow the relevant instructions in the mobile phone owner's manual.
NOTE This device has been tested for human ex posure limits and found compliant at a mini mum distance of 4 in/10 cm during opera tion.
Seite 215
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Therefore. a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be maintained in every direction when operat ing the device.
Mounting position of the product.
Safety information
Warning When charging a device that meets the Qi standard in the wireless charging tray. any metal objects located between the device and the tray can become very hot. Placing storage devices or electronic cards. such as chip cards. cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal transmission. between the device and the tray may impair the card function. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. When charg ing mobile devices. make sure there are no objects between the device and the tray.
NOTICE The tray is intended for mobile phones up to a particular size. Forceful inserting of the mobile phone into the tray can damage the tray or the mobile phone. There is a risk of damage to property. Observe the maximum dimensions for mobile phones.
Do not force the mobile phone into the tray.
Functional requirements Ignition or standby state is switched on.
The mobile phone must compatibly sup port the required Qi standard. Compati ble mobile phones. refer to page 53.
If the mobile phone does not support the Qi standard. the mobile phone can be charged using a special Qi-compatible charging case.
Use only protective jackets and covers up to a maximum thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm. Otherwise. the charging function may be impaired.
The mobile phone must not exceed the maximum size of approximately 5.9 x 3.07 x 0.62 in/150 x 78 x 16 mm.
Overview The wireless charging tray is located in the center armrest.
Front holder with LED
Storage area
Movable clamp
Inserting the mobile phone 1. Open center armrest. refer to vehicle Owner's Manual.
2. Push back the clamp.
Seite 216
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
3. Insert the mobile phone with the display facing upward in the direction of the front holder. arrow 1.
4. Place the mobile phone in the storage area. arrow 2.
5. Push the clamp forward and clamp the mobile phone in the tray.
6. Close the center armrest.
Removing the mobile phone 1. Open the center armrest.
2. Push the clamp back and remove the mobile phone.
LED displays
Color Meaning
Blue The mobile phone is charging.
Depending on the model. the blue LED is no longer illuminated once the inserted mobile phone with Qi capability is fully charged.
Or ange
The mobile phone is not charg ing.
Temperature on the mobile phone possibly too high or for eign object in the charging tray.
Red The mobile phone is not charg ing.
Contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service cen ter or repair shop.
System limits At high temperatures on the mobile phone or in the vehicle. the charging functions of the mobile phone may be limited and some functions may no longer work.
LTE-Compensator - Information and User Manual Your car is equipped with a wireless charg ing tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone and connect it to the mobile network. To en sure the best possible connection a signal booster (LTE-Compensator) is used in con junction with the WCA. The following para graphs refer to this booster: This is a CONSUMER device.
BEFORE USE. you MUST REGISTER THIS DEVICE with your wireless provider and have your provider's consent. Most wireless providers consent to the use of Compensa tors. Some providers may not consent to the use of this device on their network. If you
Seite 217
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
T-Mobile online registration link: (www.T-Mobile.com/BoosterRegistra tion); (https://saqat.t-mobile.com/sites/ SignalBooster#).
Verizon’s online registration link: (http://www.verizonwireless.com/ wcms/consumer/register-signal-boos ter.html).
AT&T online registration link (https:// securec45.securewebsession.com/ attsignalbooster.com/).
U.S.Cellular online registration link (http://www.uscellular.com/uscellular/ support/fcc-booster-registration.jsp).
Before use you must register your booster device with your wireless provider.
If you should be requested by the FCC to cease operating your booster. you are not allowed to insert your mobile phone in the charging tray anymore unless the booster is permanently deactivated by your local MINI dealer.
You must not remove the booster from the car nor use it with any other than the prein stalled coupling device or antenna. Any modification of the existing antenna or cou pling device as well as the use of other an
Seite 218
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Safety information
Warning Loose objects or devices with a cable con nection to the vehicle. for instance mobile phones. can be thrown about the car's in terior while driving. for instance in the event of an accident. braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cable con nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.
NOTICE Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can damage the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use anti-slip pads.
Overview
The following storage compartments are available in the car's interior:
Glove compartment on the front passen ger side.
Compartments in the doors.
Storage compartment in the center arm rest.
Storage compartment in front of the cup holders.
Clothes hooks
Storage tray in the center console.
Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.
Glove compartment
Safety information
Warning Folded open. the glove compartment pro trudes in the car's interior. Objects in the glove compartment can be thrown into the car's interior while driving. for instance in the event of an accident. braking or eva sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury.
Always close the glove compartment im mediately after using it.
Seite 219
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
(CID). the steering wheel buttons and spo ken instructions.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Connect new device" The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis played on the Control Display.
5. Select the functions for which the mo bile phone is to be used.
6. To perform additional steps on the mo bile phone. refer to the mobile phone owner's manual: e.g. search for or con nect the Bluetooth device or a new de vice.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap pears on the mobile phone display. Se lect the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.
7. Depending on the mobile device. a con trol number is displayed or the control number must be entered. Compare the control number dis played on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the device and on the Control Display.
Enter and confirm the same control number on the device and via the Central Information Display (CID).
The device is connected and displayed in the device list.
The mobile phone is connected and will ap pear at the top of the list of mobile phones.
Using the phone
Accepting a call Incoming call can be accepted via the Cen tral Information Display (CID) or the button on the steering wheel.
Via the Central Information Display (CID)
"Accept"
Via the button on the steering wheel
Press the button.
Via the instrument cluster Use the OK button on the steering wheel to select: "Accept"
Dialing a number 1. "Communication" 2. "Dial number" 3. Select the numbers individually.
Select the symbol.
Establish the connection via the additional phone:
1. Press the button.
2. "Call via"
Apple CarPlay preparation
Concept CarPlay allows certain functions of a com patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation and the Central Information Display (CID).
Functional requirements Compatible iPhone. iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
Corresponding mobile contract.
Bluetooth. WLAN. and Siri voice opera tion are activated on the iPhone.
Seite 22
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches on.
Closing Fold up the cover.
Compartments in the doors
General information There are storage compartments in the doors.
Safety information
Warning Breakable objects. such as glass bottles or glasses. can break in the event of an acci dent or a braking or evasive maneuver.
Broken glass can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not use any break able objects while driving. Only stow breakable objects in closed storage com partments.
Center armrest
General information The center armrest contains a storage com partment.
Opening
Press button. arrow 1. and open center arm rest upward. arrow 2.
Adjusting the height
Press button. arrow 1. and swing center armrest upward or downward into the de sired height. arrow 2.
Seite 220
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Cup holders
Safety information
Warning Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may damage the cup holders or be thrown about the car’s interior in the event of an accident. an evasive maneuver. or forceful braking. Spilled liquids can distract from the traffic conditions and lead to an acci dent. Hot drinks can damage the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not force objects into the cup holder. Use lightweight. shatterproof. and sealable containers. Do not transport hot bever ages.
Front
In the center console.
Rear
For 3-door models: in front of the rear seats and in the side armrests.
For 5-door models: in front of the rear seats.
Clothes hooks
General information 3-door model: The clothes hooks are located above the side windows in the rear.
5-door model: The clothes hooks are located above the rear doors.
Safety information
Warning Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can obstruct the view while driving. There is a risk of accident. When suspending cloth ing articles from the clothes hooks. ensure
Seite 221
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Warning Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to prop erty. Only hang lightweight objects. for in stance clothing articles. from the clothes hooks.
Seite 222
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Cargo area
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Loading
Safety information
Warning High gross weight can overheat the tires. damage them internally and cause a sud den drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics may be negatively im pacted. reducing lane stability. lengthen ing the braking distances and changing the steering response. There is a risk of accident. Pay attention to the permitted load capacity of the tires and never exceed the permitted gross weight.
Warning Loose objects or devices with a cable con nection to the vehicle. for instance mobile phones. can be thrown about the car's in terior while driving. for instance in the event of an accident. braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure
Warning Improperly stowed objects can shift and be thrown into the car's interior. for in stance in the event of an accident or dur ing braking and evasive maneuver. Vehi cle occupants can be hit and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects and cargo properly.
NOTICE Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load ca pacity. For example. if the “XXX” amount equals 1. 00 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehi cle. the amount of available cargo and
Seite 223
Cargo area CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
5. Determine the combined weight of lug gage and cargo being loaded on the ve hicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load ca pacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer. load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the availa ble cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
On 3-door models
John Cooper Works GP
On 5-door models
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants. the less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos sible. directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests.
Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied. secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.
If necessary. fold down the rear back rests to stow large cargo.
Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests.
Small and light cargo: secure with ratchet straps or draw straps.
Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo straps.
Seite 224
CONTROLS Cargo area
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
John Cooper Works GP
Stow heavy cargo as low and as far for ward as possible. directly behind the cargo rod.
Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the cargo rod.
Do not stow cargo on top of the cargo rod.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
Without storage compartment package: to secure the cargo there are two lashing eyes. arrow 1. in the cargo area.
John Cooper Works GP: do not use the loop on the right side to secure cargo. The loop on the right side is intended exclusively as an anchor for the upper retaining strap with child restraint systems. refer to page 97.
With storage compartment package: to se cure the cargo there are six lashing eyes. ar rows 1 and 2. in the cargo area.
Attach load securing aids. such as lashing straps. tensioning straps. draw straps or cargo nets. to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Cargo cover
General information When the tailgate is opened. the cargo cover is raised.
Safety information
Warning Loose objects or devices with a cable con nection to the vehicle. for instance mobile phones. can be thrown about the car's in terior while driving. for instance in the event of an accident. braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cable con nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.
Removing For storing bulky objects the cargo cover can be removed.
1. Detach the left and right retaining straps at the tailgate.
2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets on the left and right.
Seite 225
Cargo area CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Installing 1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizon tally into the two side brackets until it audibly engages.
2. Attach the left and right retaining straps at the tailgate.
Storage space under cargo floor panel
Located under the cargo floor panel on the right side is a trough for the onboard vehi cle tool kit.
Fold the right side of the cargo floor panel upward to remove the onboard vehicle tool kit.
Enlarging the cargo area
Concept The cargo area can be enlarged as follows: The rear seat backrests can be folded down.
The rear seat backrests can be moved into an upright loading position using the cargo setting.
General information The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts at a ratio of 60 to 40. The left rear seat backrest is connected to the center section.
The rear seat backrests can be folded down from the rear.
Safety information
Warning Danger of jamming with folding down the backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the rear backrest and the of the head restraint is clear prior to folding down.
Warning If a rear seat backrest is not locked. unse cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s interior; for instance. in the event of an ac cident. braking or an evasive maneuver.
There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked after fold ing it back.
Warning With a rear backrest that is not locked. the protective function of the middle safety belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. If you are using the middle safety belt. lock the wider rear seat backrest.
Warning The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child re
Seite 226
CONTROLS Cargo area
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Warning Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.
Folding down the rear seat backrest from the rear 1. Before the rear seat backrest is folded down. hook the corresponding safety belt into the belt buckle on the side.
2. Pull the lever up. arrow 1. and fold the rear seat backrest forward. arrow 2.
Cargo position
Concept The rear seat backrests can be moved into an upright loading position.
Adjusting 1. Release the backrest. and tilt it forward.
2. Fold the frame up until it engages.
3. Fold back and engage the rear seat backrest.
Folding back the backrest Fold up the backrest and press it into the latch. Make sure that the safety belt is not caught behind the backrest or in between the backrest and the rear seats.
Variable cargo area floor
Concept With the variable cargo area floor. the cargo area can be configured corresponding to transport requirements.
General information Follow instructions on securing cargo. refer to page 223.
Seite 227
Cargo area CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Removing the cargo floor panel
5-door models: To change the position of the cargo area floor. first fold up the rear part of the cargo area floor.
Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear and fold slightly upward. Next. pull it backward from the supports.
The cargo floor panel can be removed from the cargo area above the tail lights.
Lower position
Larger objects can be transported.
Space for smaller objects remains be tween the fixed and variable cargo area floor.
Folded up position
Safety information
Warning Improper use of the variable cargo floor panel can lead to a danger of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneu vers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Do not use the variable cargo floor panel to separate the cargo area and car's interior in the sense of a parti tion net.
Only use the variable cargo floor panel in the folded-up position when the backrests are folded up and locked.
Fold down the variable cargo floor panel before driving off.
Always secure cargo against shifting. using straps. belts and lashing eyes. for instance.
Fold up the cargo floor panel
Fold up the cargo floor panel in the lower position and push it behind the locks. arrow.
You've reached the maximum cargo height.
Seite 228
CONTROLS Cargo area
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Upper position
With the backrests folded down. a long. flat loading surface is produced.
For 3-door models: Maximum load in this position: 330 lbs/150 kg.
For 5-door models: Maximum load in this position: 441 lbs/200 kg.
Space for objects remains between the fixed and variable cargo area floor.
Seite 229
Cargo area CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings" 5. Select the following settings:
"Bluetooth"
"Apple CarPlay"
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay" The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list.
Seite 23
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Breaking-in period
General information Moving parts need to begin working to gether smoothly.
The following instructions will help you to achieve a long vehicle life and good effi ciency.
During break-in. do not use the Launch Control. refer to page 121.
Safety information
Warning Due to new parts and components. safety and driver assistance systems can react with a delay. There is a risk of accident.
After installing new parts or with a new vehicle. drive conservatively and inter vene early if necessary. Observe the break in procedures of the respective parts and components.
Engine. transmission. and axle drive
Up to 1. 00 miles/2. 00 km Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed: For gasoline engine 4. 00 rpm and 100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all cir cumstances.
From 1. 00 miles/2. 00 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.
Tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac turing circumstances when tires are brand new; they achieve their full traction poten tial after a break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full effectiveness after ap prox. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately during this break-in period.
Clutch The function of the clutch reaches its opti mal level only after a distance driven of ap prox. 300 miles/500 km. During this break in period. engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement The same break-in procedures should be ob served if any of the components mentioned
Seite 230
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
Safety information
Warning An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi cle and can endanger occupants and other traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the event of an accident. braking or eva sive maneuvers. In addition. exhaust fumes may enter the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not drive with the tailgate open.
Driving with the tailgate open If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided: Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
Drive moderately.
Ice on window glass
NOTICE The window will be lowered slightly when pulling on the door handle. In the event of frost. the window may freeze up and not be lowered. There is a risk of damage to property. When pulling on the door han dle. make sure that the window is lowered.
If necessary. remove snow and ice from the window. Do not open the door with force.
Hot exhaust gas system
Warning High temperatures can occur underneath the body. for instance caused by the ex haust gas system. while driving. Contact with the exhaust gas system can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the hot exhaust gas system. includ ing the exhaust pipe.
Warning If combustible materials. such as leaves or grass. come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas system. these materials can ignite. There is a risk of fire and inju ries. Do not remove the heat shields instal led and never apply undercoating to them.
Make sure that no combustible materials can come in contact with hot vehicle parts in driving operation. idle or during park ing.
Mobile communication devices in the vehicle
Warning Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can influence one another. There is radiation due to the transmission operations of mo bile phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. If possible. in the car's interior use only mobile phones with direct connections to an exterior an tenna in order to exclude mutual interfer ence and deflect the radiation from the car's interior.
Seite 231
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Hydroplaning On wet or slushy roads. a wedge of water can form between the tires and road sur face.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydro planing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface. ultimately undermin ing your ability to steer and brake the vehi cle.
Driving through water
General information When driving through water. follow the fol lowing: Deactivate Auto Start/Stop function.
Drive through calm water only.
Drive through water only if it is not deeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.
Drive through water no faster than walking speed. up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Safety information
NOTICE When driving too quickly through too deep water. water can enter into the en gine compartment. the electrical system or the transmission. There is a risk of damage to property. When driving through water. do not exceed the maximum indicated wa ter level and the maximum speed for driv ing through water.
Braking safely
General information The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock Braking System ABS as a standard feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations that require such.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode.
John Cooper Works GP: brake system The vehicle has a brake system that was adapted for the increased driving dynamics of the vehicle.
Because of the design for high braking power. durability. and controllability. oper ating noises may be heard when braking.
However. this noise development has no ef fect on the performance. operational safety. and durability of the brake.
Objects in the area around the pedals
Warning Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob jects in the vehicle such that they are se cured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were re moved. for instance for cleaning.
Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet. salted. or in heavy rain. gently press the brake pedal every few miles.
Seite 232
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Ensure that this action does not endanger other traffic.
The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.
In this way braking efficiency will be avail able when you need it.
Hills
General information Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear that requires least braking effort.
Otherwise. the brakes may overheat and re duce brake efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down. going all the way to first gear. if needed.
Safety information
Warning Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures. brakes wearing out and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Avoid placing exces sive stress on the brake system.
Warning In idle state or with the engine switched off. safety functions. for instance engine braking effect. braking assistance and steering assistance. may not be available.
There is a risk of accident. Do not attempt to drive in idle state or with the engine switched off.
Brake disc corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and contami nation on the brake pads are increased by the following circumstances:
Low mileage.
Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all.
Infrequent use of the brakes.
Aggressive. acidic. or alkaline cleaning agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in their response - generally this cannot be corrected.
Condensation water under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control. condensation water develops and collects underneath the vehicle.
Ground clearance
NOTICE If the ground clearance is insufficient. e.g.. curbs or underground garage entrances. contact with vehicle parts. e.g. spoiler. and the underbody may occur. There is a risk of damage to property. Ensure that there is sufficient ground clearance availa ble.
Roof-mounted luggage rack
General information Installation only possible with roof rack.
Roof racks are available as special accesso ries.
Mounting Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack.
Seite 233
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Loading Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded. they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response.
Therefore. note the following when loading and driving: Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight.
Be sure that adequate clearance is main tained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Distribute the roof load uniformly.
The roof load should not extend past the loading area.
Always place the heaviest pieces on the bottom.
Secure the roof luggage firmly. for in stance using ratchet straps.
Do not let objects project into the open ing path of the tailgate.
Drive cautiously and avoid sudden ac celeration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.
Rear luggage rack
General information Installation only possible with rear luggage rack preparation.
Rear luggage racks that are classified by the manufacturer of the vehicle to be suitable are available as special accessories.
Mounting
COOPER
The fixing points. arrows 1. and the socket. arrow 2. are located below the covers in the bumper.
Remove the covers before installing the rear luggage rack.
Loading Because rear luggage racks raise the vehi cle's center of gravity when loaded. they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response.
Therefore. note the following when loading and driving: Do not exceed the approved axle load and the approved gross vehicle weight.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden accelera tion and braking maneuvers. Take cor ners gently.
Seite 234
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Power consumption Before starting to drive. check the function of the rear luggage rack lights. Before start ing to drive. check the function of the trailer tail lights.
The rear luggage rack lights must not con sume more than: Turn signals: 42 watts per side.
Rear lights: 50 watts per side.
Brake lights: 84 watts in total.
Rear fog lights: 42 watts in total.
Backup light: 42 watts in total.
Keep activation times of power consumers short with the engine switched off to pro tect the vehicle battery.
Driving on racetracks
Warning The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport or motor sport type competition.
There is a risk of accident. Do not use the vehicle for M Sport or motor sport type competitions.
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
This wear is not covered by the warranty.
John Cooper Works GP: race track operation Always check the engine oil level before driving on a racetrack. Top up up the engine oil to the maximum value for use on a race track.
The vehicle can only be used under certain conditions in the M Sport or M Sport similar competition. This requires adjustments on the vehicle. such as the use of specific oper ating fluids.
Have the vehicle prepared for race track op eration by a dealer’s service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 235
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Reducing fuel consumption
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
The vehicle contains advanced technologies for the reduction of consumption and emis sion values.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of different factors.
The implementation of certain measures. driving style and regular maintenance can influence fuel consumption and environ mental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consump tion.
Remove attached parts follow ing use
Remove roof-mounted or rear luggage racks which are no longer required following use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerodynamics and increase the fuel con sumption.
Close the windows and glass sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and raises fuel consumption.
Tires
General information Tires can affect consumption in various ways. for instance tire size may influence consumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and. if needed. correct the tire infla tion pressure at least twice a month and be fore starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling resistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear.
Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away. but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.
Seite 236
DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Look well ahead when driving
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel consumption.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and brak ing.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you.
Avoid high engine speeds
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear.
If necessary. observe the vehicle's gear shift indicator. refer to page 132.
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light. take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the ac celerator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coast ing.
Switch off the engine during longer stops
Switching off the engine Switch off the engine during longer stops. for instance at traffic lights. railroad cross ings or in traffic congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle automatically switches off the engine dur ing a stop.
If the engine is switched off and then re started rather than leaving the engine run ning constantly. fuel consumption and emis sions are reduced. Savings can begin within a few seconds of switching off the engine.
In addition. fuel consumption is also deter mined by other factors. such as driving style. road conditions. maintenance or envi ronmental factors.
Switch off any functions that are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and consume additional fuel. especially in city and stop-and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not needed.
Have maintenance carried out
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and serv ice life. MINI recommends that mainte nance work be performed by a MINI service center.
Also note the MINI maintenance systems. refer to page 281.
GREEN Mode
Concept GREEN Mode supports a driving style that saves on consumption. For this purpose. the engine control and comfort features. for in stance the climate control output. are ad justed.
For Steptronic transmission:
Seite 237
Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Under certain conditions the engine is auto matically decoupled from the transmission in the D selector lever position. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce consumption. The D selector lever position remains engaged.
In addition. context-sensitive instructions are displayed to assist with an efficient driving style.
The achieved extended range is displayed in the instrument cluster as bonus range.
General information The system includes the following MINI MALISM functions and MINIMALISM dis plays: GREEN Limit. refer to page 238
GREEN climate control. refer to page 238.
GREEN bonus range. refer to page 239.
GREEN tip. driving instruction. refer to page 239.
Coasting driving condition. refer to page 240.
MINIMALISM analyzer. refer to page 242.
Activating GREEN Mode
Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward until GREEN is displayed in the in strument cluster.
Configuring GREEN
Via MINI Driving Modes switch 1. Activating GREEN Mode.
2. "Configure GREEN" 3. Select the desired setting.
Via the Central Information Display (CID)
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Configure GREEN" 4. Select the desired setting.
Activating/deactivating the functions The following functions can be activated/ deactivated: "GREEN speed warning"
"GREEN climate control"
"Coasting"
Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.
GREEN Limit "GREEN speed warning": GREEN Limit is activated.
A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of the set GREEN Limit is exceeded.
"Tip at:" Set the desired speed for the GREEN Limit.
GREEN climate control Climate control is set to be efficient.
By making a slight change to the set tem perature and adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the car's interior consumption can be economized.
The power output to the seat heater and ex terior mirror is reduced.
Coasting Efficiency can be optimized by disengaging the engine and coasting. refer to page 240. with the engine idling.
This function is only available in GREEN Mode.
Seite 238
DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Deactivate the function to use the braking effect of the engine when traveling down hill.
GREEN potential savings Shows potential savings with the current settings in percentages.
Display in the instrument cluster
GREEN bonus range
A modified driving style helps you extend your driving range.
The range extension can be displayed as the bonus range in the instrument cluster.
The bonus range is shown in the range dis play.
The bonus range is automatically reset ev ery time the vehicle is refueled.
Green display: efficient driving style.
Gray display: modify driving style. for instance by backing off the accelerator pedal.
Efficiency display
A bar display in the instru ment cluster indicates your current driving efficiency.
Mark in the left area. arrow 1: display for energy recovered by coasting or when braking.
Mark in the right area. arrow 2: display when accelerating.
The efficiency of your driving style is shown by the position of the mark: Mark inside the green range: efficient driving style.
Mark outside the green range: modify driving style. for example by backing off the accelerator.
GREEN tip. driving instruction
General information The GREEN tip indicates that your driving style can be modified to be more efficient. for example by backing off the accelerator.
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: display
Activating/deactivating the display Activate information relating to the driving style and GREEN tips in the instrument cluster using the Central Information Dis play (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Instrument panel" 5. "GREEN info"
Seite 239
Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
On the road
Driving
Starting and stopping the engine
Ignition on/off
On: press the Start/Stop button.
Most of the indicator/ warning lights light up for a varied length of time.
Off: press the Start/Stop button again.
All indicator lights go out.
Radio-ready state: when the ignition is switched off. press the ON/OFF button on the radio or when the engine is run ning. press the Start/Stop button.
Some electronic systems/power con sumers remain ready for operation.
Start/stop engine
Steptronic transmission: starting 1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Engage selector lever position P or N.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Manual transmission: starting 1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neutral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Steptronic transmission: switching off 1. When the vehicle is stationary. apply the parking brake.
2. Engage selector lever position P.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Manual transmission: switching off 1. With the vehicle at a standstill. press the Start/Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function Steptronic transmission: switches the en gine off automatically while stationary to save fuel. The engine starts automatically when the brake pedal is released.
Manual transmission: switches the engine off automatically while stationary to save fuel. As soon as the clutch pedal is de pressed. the engine starts automatically.
Parking brake
Applying The lever automatically engages after being pulled up.
Releasing
Raise lever slightly. press the button and guide the lever down.
Seite 24
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
GREEN tip. symbols An additional symbol and text instructions are displayed.
Symbol Measure
For an efficient driving style. look well ahead when driving. accelerate conservatively. and delay accelerating.
Reduce speed to the selected GREEN speed.
Steptronic transmission: Switch from M/S to D and avoid manual shift interventions.
Manual transmission: Follow the shift instructions.
Manual transmission: Engage neutral for an engine stop.
Indications on the Control Display
Displaying MINIMALISM information The current efficiency of the functions in GREEN Mode can be displayed on the Con trol Display.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Technology in action" 3. "MINIMALISM" Information is shown on the following func tions: Auto Start/Stop function.
Energy recovery.
Coasting.
Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Technology in action" 3. "MINIMALISM Analyser" Further information on the MINIMALISM analyzer. refer to page 242.
Coasting
Concept The function helps to conserve fuel.
To do this. under certain conditions the en gine is automatically decoupled from the transmission when selector lever position D is set. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce consumption.
Selector lever position D remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coasting.
As soon as you step on the brake or acceler ator pedal. the engine is automatically cou pled again.
General information Coasting is a component of the GREEN driv ing mode.
Coasting is automatically activated when the GREEN driving mode is called via the MINI Driving Modes switch. refer to page 176.
A proactive driving style helps the driver to use the function often and supports the effi cient effect of coasting.
Functional requirements The function is available in the speed range from approx. 15 mph/25 km/h up to 100 mph/160 km/h. Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not operated.
Seite 240
DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
The selector lever is in selector lever po sition D.
Engine and transmission are at operat ing temperature.
With a camera in the area of the interior mirror: the system does not detect any vehicles ahead of you.
Operation via shift paddles
Concept Depending on your vehicle's equipment. the coasting mode can be influenced with the shift paddles.
Activating/deactivating coasting via shift paddles 1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right shift paddle.
2. To activate coasting mode. actuate the right shift paddle again.
To deactivate. actuate the left shift paddle.
Display
Instrument cluster without enhanced features
The bar display below the tachometer is fil led in green and the mark appears at the zero point. The tachometer indicates idle speed.
Instrument cluster with enhanced features
The bar display below the tachometer is fil led in green and the mark appears at the zero point. The tachometer indicates idle speed.
Indications on the Control Display The coasting driving condition is displayed in the MINIMALISM Info while driving.
The distance traveled in the coasting driv ing condition is indicated by a counter.
Displaying MINIMALISM information Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Technology in action" 3. "MINIMALISM"
System limits The function is not available if one of the following conditions applies: DSC OFF and TRACTION are activated.
Cruise control is activated.
If driving in the dynamic limit range.
If driving on steep uphill or downhill grades.
The battery charge state is temporarily too low.
The vehicle electrical system is drawing excessive current.
Seite 241
Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
MINIMALISM analyzer
Concept The function helps develop an especially ef ficient driving style and to conserve fuel.
For this purpose. the driving style is ana lyzed. The assessment is done in various categories and is displayed on the Control Display.
This display will help you adjust your driv ing style and save some fuel.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by adopting an efficient driving style. This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range in the instrument cluster and on the Control Dis play.
Functional requirement This function is available in GREEN Mode.
Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Technology in action" 3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"
Display on the Control Display The display of the MINIMALISM analyzer consists of a fish in a water glass. a table of values and the display of the achieved bo nus range.
The fish and the movements of the water in the bowl symbolize the efficiency of the driving style.
Depending on the equipment. the fish is shown with efficient and inefficient driving style or only with inefficient driving style.
The more efficient the driving style. the less the water sloshes around in the bowl and the better is the fish's mood. If the driving style is inefficient. the water oscillates. the
Seite 242
DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Refueling
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation. refer to page 246. prior to refueling.
Safety information
NOTICE With a driving range of less than 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel promptly.
Fuel cap
Opening 1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge and open it.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at tached to the fuel filler flap.
Seite 244
MOBILITY Refueling
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Closing
Warning The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jammed and crushed during closing. The cap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Pay atten tion that the retaining strap is not jammed or crushed when closing the cap.
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.
2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it en gages.
Emergency unlocking It may be necessary in certain situations to unlock the fuel filler flap manually. for in stance with an electrical fault.
Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Follow the following when re fueling
General information When refueling. insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes: Premature switching off.
Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed prop erly after refueling. otherwise the emissions warning light may light up.
Follow safety regulations posted at the gas station.
Safety information
NOTICE Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid overfilling.
Seite 245
Refueling MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Fuel recommendation
General information Depending on the region. many gas stations sell fuel that has been customized to winter or summer conditions. Fuel that is available in winter. for instance helps make a cold start easier.
Gasoline
General information For the best fuel efficiency. the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as containing metal must not be used.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %. i. e. E10 or E25. may be used for refu eling.
Ethanol should meet the following quality standards: US: ASTM 4806–xx CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
Safety information
NOTICE Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel system and engine. Furthermore. the cata lytic converter is permanently damaged.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not refuel or add the following in the case of gasoline engines: Leaded gasoline.
Metallic additives. for instance man ganese or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refueling with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
NOTICE Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and the engine. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use fuels with a higher percentage of ethanol than recommended.
Do not refuel with fuels containing metha nol. e.g. M5 to M100.
NOTICE Fuel that does not comply with the mini mum quality can compromise engine func tion or cause engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not fill with fuel that does not comply with the mini mum quality.
Seite 246
MOBILITY Fuel
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
CAUTION The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi tionally. problems relating to drivability. starting and stalling. especially under cer tain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high alti tude. may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered. we recommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade — AKI number — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful engine deposits. it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommenda tions may result in the need for unsched uled maintenance.
Recommended fuel grade MINI recommends AKI 91.
John Cooper Works/John Cooper Works GP: MINI recommends AKI 93.
Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the rated performance and consumption values.
Minimum fuel grade MINI recommends AKI 89.
John Cooper Works/John Cooper Works GP: MINI recommends AKI 91.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating. the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high external tem peratures. This has no effect on the engine life.
Seite 247
Fuel MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Tire inflation pressure
General information The tire characteristics and tire inflation pressure influence the following: The service life of the tires.
Road safety.
Driving comfort.
Fuel consumption.
Safety information
Warning A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure may heat up significantly and sustain damage. This will have a negative impact on aspects of handling. such as steering and braking response. There is a risk of accident. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure. and correct it as needed. for instance twice a month and be fore a long trip.
Tire inflation pressure specifications
In the tire inflation pressure table The tire inflation pressure table. refer to page 250. contains all tire inflation pres sure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pres sure. please note the following: Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Maximum permitted driving speed.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
General information Tires heat up while driving. The tire infla tion pressure increases with the tire tem perature.
Tires have a natural. consistent loss of tire inflation pressure.
The displays of inflation devices may under read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Checking using tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table The tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold tires or tires at the same tempera ture as the ambient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when the tires are cold. i.e.: Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not been exceeded.
Seite 248
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
If the vehicle has not moved again for at least 2 hours after a trip.
1. Determine the intended tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires. using a pressure gage. for ex ample.
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the actual tire inflation pressure deviates from the intended tire inflation pres sure.
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed onto the tire valves.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.
For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Checking the tire inflation pressure of the emergency wheel
Located behind the bumper on the under side of the vehicle is an opening for check ing the tire inflation pressure.
Tire pressures up to 100 mph/ 160 km/h For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort. note the pres sure values in the tire inflation pressure ta ble. refer to page 250. and adjust as neces sary.
These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driv er's door pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/ 160 km/h.
Seite 249
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Manual transmission
Shifting When shifting into 5th or 6th gear. push the gearshift lever to the right in order to prevent inadvertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear.
Reverse gear Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
To overcome the resistance push the gear shift lever dynamically to the left and en gage reverse gear with a forward shifting movement.
Steptronic transmission
Selector lever positions Parking position P.
R is reverse.
Neutral N.
Drive mode D.
Engage selector lever position P or R only when the vehicle is stationary.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a drive mode or reverse. maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Selector lever lock A lock prevents an inadvertent change from selector lever position P to another selector lever position and. depending on the trans mission version. inadvertent switching to selector lever position P or R.
To release the lock: with the brake pedal de pressed. press the button on the front or side of the selector lever.
Steptronic transmission. Sport and manual mode
Sport program: Press the selector lever to the left from se lector lever position D.
Manual mode: To shift down: press the selector lever forward.
To shift up: pull the selector lever rear wards.
High beams. headlight flasher. turn signal. roadside parking light
High beams. headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward. High beams on. arrow 1.
The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on.
High beams off/headlight flasher. ar row 2.
Seite 25
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Maximum tire load Maximum tire load is the maximum permis sible weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR – on the certification label on the driver’s door pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR. Note. front vs. rear GAWR and tire loads. respectively.
Speed letter
Designation Maximum speed
R: up to 106 mph/170 km/h
Tire Identification Number DOT-Code: DOT xxxx xxx 0120 xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx: tire size and tire design 0120: tire age Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
Recommendation Regardless of the tire tread. replace tires at least every 6 years.
Manufacture date You can find the manufacture date of the tire on the tire's sidewall.
Designation Manufacture date
DOT … 0120 1st week 2020
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applica ble on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera ture A
DOT Quality Grades Treadwear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. E.g. a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half. 1 g. times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the ac tual conditions of their use. however. and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits. service prac tices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction The traction grades. from highest to lowest. are AA. A. B. and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
Seite 255
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Temperature The temperature grades are A. the highest.
B. and C. representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life. and excessive tempera ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perform ance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning The temperature grade for this tire is es tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed. un derinflation. or excessive loading. either separately or in combination. can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
RSC – Run-flat tires Run-flat tires. refer to page 259. are labeled with a circular symbol containing the let ters RSC marked on the sidewall.
M+S Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread of less than 0.12 in/3 mm. otherwise there is an in creased risk of hydroplaning.
Winter tires Do not drive with a tire tread of less than 0.16 in/4 mm. as such tires are less suitable for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally re quired minimum height of 0.063 in ches/1.6 mm.
The positions of the wear indicators are marked on the tire sidewall with TWI. Tread Wear Indicator.
Seite 256
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Tire damage
General information Inspect your tires regularly for damage. for eign objects lodged in the tread. and tread wear.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfa ces. as well as debris. curbs and other obsta cles can cause serious damage to wheels. tires and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires. which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road haz ards and reduce your speed. especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle malfunctions: Unusual vibrations.
Unusual tire or running noises.
Unusual handling such as a strong ten dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can be caused by the following sit uations. for instance: Driving over curbs.
Road damage.
Tire inflation pressure too low.
Vehicle overloading.
Incorrect tire storage.
Safety information
Warning Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres sure. which can lead to loss of vehicle con trol. There is a risk of accident. If tire dam age is suspected while driving. immediately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For this pur pose. drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s service center or another qualified service
Warning Tires can become damaged by driving over obstacles. e.g. curbs or road damage. at high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-section. the higher the risk of tire damage. There is a danger of accidents and property damage. If possible. avoid driving over objects or road conditions that may damage tires. or drive over them slowly and carefully.
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting and wheel balancing Have mounting and tire and wheel balanc ing carried out by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination
General information You can ask the dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop about the correct wheel/tire combina tion and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Safety information
Warning Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle. for instance due to contact with the body due to tolerances despite the same official size rating. There is a risk of
Seite 257
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Warning Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will have a negative impact on the vehicle's handling and on the function of a variety of systems. such as the ABS Antilock Brak ing System or DSC Dynamic Stability Con trol. There is a risk of accident. To main tain good handling and vehicle response. use only tires with a single tread configu ration from a single manufacturer. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manu facturer for your vehicle type. Following tire damage. have the original wheel/tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size. the manufacturer of the vehicle recommends certain tire brands.
The tire brands can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
New tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac turing circumstances when tires are brand
Retreaded tires
Warning Retreaded tires can have different tire cas ing structures. With advanced age the service life can be limited. There is a risk of an accident. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not recommend the use of re treaded tires.
The manufacturer of the vehicle does not recommend the use of retreaded tires.
Winter tires Winter tires are recommended for operat ing on winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro vide better winter traction than summer tires. they usually do not provide the same level of performance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires. then attach a label showing the permissible maximum speed in the field of view. The label is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
With winter tires mounted. observe and do not exceed the permissible maximum speed.
Changing runflat tires For your own safety. use only runflat tires.
Further information is available from a deal er's service center or another qualified serv ice center or repair shop.
Seite 258
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Rotating wheels between axles Different wear patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs between the axles to achieve even wear. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. After rotating. check the tire pressure and correct. if needed.
Storing tires
Tire inflation pressure Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool. dry and dark place.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil. grease. and solvents.
Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
Run-flat tires
Concept Run-flat tires permit continued driving un der restricted conditions even in the event of a complete loss of tire inflation pressure.
General information The wheels are composed of tires that are self-supporting to a limited degree.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a tire inflation pressure loss.
Follow the instructions for continued driv ing with a flat tire.
Safety information
Warning The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance. reduced lane stabil ity when braking. braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Label
The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with RSC Run-flat System Component.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground.
Switch on the hazard warning system.
Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake.
Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead posi tion and engage the steering wheel lock.
Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out
Seite 259
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Turn signal
On: press the lever past the resistance point.
Off: lightly tap the lever to the resist ance point.
Off: press the lever past the resistance point in the opposite direction.
Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the lever up or down.
Brief signaling: press the lever to the re sistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.
Canada: roadside parking light
To illuminate the vehicle on one side. On: with the ignition switched off. press the lever either up or down past the re sistance point for approx. 2 seconds.
Off: briefly press the lever to the resist ance point in the opposite direction.
Lights and lighting
Light functions
Symbol Function
Front fog lights.
Automatic headlight control.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe
Switching on
Press the lever up until the desired position is reached. Resting position of the wipers: posi tion 0.
Seite 26
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
If necessary. set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.
John Cooper Works GP: sport tires
General information The vehicle is fitted with sport tires. which have been optimized for use on a racetrack in dry conditions.
More information on wheels and tires: From a dealer’s service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop.
Internet: www.hankooktire.com
Safety information
Warning At temperatures below 14 ℉/-10 ℃. the sport tires can become damaged. for in stance torn and broken. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to prop erty. Do not move. mount. or drive on sport tires at temperatures below 14 ℉/-10 ℃.
Storage If the sport tires are not used for a long pe riod of time. we recommend removing the wheels from the vehicle and lowering the tire inflation pressure to half the level specified by the manufacturer.
Store wheels or sport tires in a clean. dry. and dark place at temperatures above 32 ℉/0 ℃.
Use on the road The sport tires meet the legal regulations for use on public roads.
After being used on a racetrack. the sport tires may no longer be suitable for road use.
Therefore. after they have been used on a racetrack. check the sport tires against the legal regulations for use on public roads. for instance the minimum tread depth.
Use on a racetrack
General information Inspect the sport tires for damage. foreign objects lodged in the tread. and tread wear every time before using them on a race track.
Bring the sport tires to the correct tempera ture for use on a racetrack. To do this. drive a few circuits with an appropriate driving style.
Intensive use After an extended period of intensive driv ing on a racetrack and driving over curbs or leaving the roadway. the sport tires can be come damaged.
Inspect the sport tires for damage. foreign objects lodged in the tread. and tread wear.
The wheel must be removed in order to in spect the outside and inside of the sport tires. Have the sport tires checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Tire inflation pressure
General information Check the tire inflation pressure regularly and correct it if necessary. taking the regu lations for use on the road or a racetrack into account.
Seite 260
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Tire inflation pressure specifications The tire inflation pressure table contains all tire inflation pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tempera ture. The tire inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pres sure. please note the following: Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Maximum permitted driving speed.
Use on a racetrack The tires heat up while driving. The tire in flation pressure increases with the tire tem perature.
After a period of intensive driving. correct the tire inflation pressure in the heated tires to the tire inflation pressure values specified by the vehicle manufacturer.
After they have been used on a racetrack. allow the tires to cool down for at least 2 hours. Reset the tire inflation pressure of the cold tires to the tire inflation pressure values specified by the vehicle manufac turer.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure. carry out a reset of the Tire Pressure Moni tor TPM.
Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifica tions in bar/PSI with cold tires
2.5 / 36 2.2 / 32
Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifica tions in bar/PSI with cold tires
225/35 R 18 87 Y XL
3.1 / 45 2.6 / 38
Mobility System
Concept With the Mobility System. minor tire dam age can be sealed temporarily to enable con tinued travel. To accomplish this. sealant is pumped into the tires. which seals the dam age from the inside.
General information Follow the instructions on using the Mobility System found on the compres sor and sealant container.
Use of the Mobility System may be inef fective if the tire puncture measures ap prox. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
Contact a dealer's service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
Do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign objects if they are visibly protruding from the tire.
Pull the speed limit sticker off the seal ant container and apply it to the steer ing wheel.
The use of a sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case.
Seite 261
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure.
Overview
Storage The Mobility System is located under the cargo floor panel.
Sealant container
Sealant container. arrow 1.
Filling hose. arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant con tainer.
Compressor
Sealant container unlocking
Sealant container holder
Tire pressure gage
Reduce tire inflation pressure button
On/off switch
Compressor
Connector/cable for socket
Connection hose
Safety measures Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground.
Switch on the hazard warning system.
Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake.
Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead posi tion and engage the steering wheel lock.
Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out side the immediate area in a safe place. such as behind a guardrail.
If necessary. set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.
Filling the tire with sealant
Safety information
DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila tion is insufficient. harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollutants which are color less and odorless. In enclosed areas. ex haust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.
NOTICE The compressor can overheat during ex tended operation. There is a risk of dam age to property. Do not run the compres sor for more than 10 minutes.
Seite 262
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Filling 1. Shake the sealant container.
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of the sealant container. Do not kink the hose.
3. Slide the sealant container into the holder on the compressor housing. en suring that it engages audibly.
4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con tainer onto the tire valve of the non working wheel.
5. With the compressor switched off. in sert the plug into the power socket in side the vehicle.
6. With the ignition switched on or the en gine running. switch on the compressor.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant. the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this point.
Seite 263
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Checking and adjusting the tire inflation pressure
Checking 1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire pressure gage.
To continue the trip. a tire inflation pres sure of at least 2 bar must be reached.
Removing and stowing the sealant container 1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant container from the tire valve.
2. Press the red unlocking device.
3. Remove the sealant container from the compressor.
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is not reached 1. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to distribute the sealant in the tire.
3. Screw the connection hose of the com pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
4. Insert the connector into the power socket inside the vehicle.
5. With the ignition switched on or the en gine running. switch on the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar cannot be reached. contact your dealer's service center or another quali fied service center or repair shop.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is reached. see Minimum tire infla tion pressure is reached.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the compressor from the tire valve.
7. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.
8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached 1. Unscrew the connection hose of the compressor from the tire valve.
2. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.
3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx.
5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible. do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h.
Seite 264
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Adjustment 1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the com pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
3. Insert the connector into the power socket inside the vehicle.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least 2.0 bar. Increase tire inflation pressure: with the ignition switched on or the en gine running. switch on the com pressor.
Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the button on the compressor.
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the compressor from the tire valve.
6. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.
7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Continuing the trip Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. refer to page 159.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor. refer to page 154.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant container of the Mobility System promptly.
Snow chains
General information The manufacturer of the vehicle has deter mined certain wheels and tires to be suita ble for operation on the vehicle.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's in structions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains. as doing so may re sult in incorrect readings.
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM after mounting snow chains. as doing so may result in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains. briefly ac tivate Dynamic Traction Control DTC. if needed.
Safety information
Warning With the mounting of snow chains on un suitable tires. the snow chains can come into contact with vehicle parts. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Only mount snow chains on tires that are designated by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of snow chains.
Seite 265
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Warning Insufficiently tight snow chains may dam age tires and vehicle components. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tight. Re tighten as needed according to the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.
Fine-link snow chains The manufacturer of the vehicle recom mends the use of fine-link snow chains. Cer tain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of the ve hicle and recommended as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is available from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Use Use only in pairs on the front wheels. equip ped with the tires of the following size: 175/65 R 15.
175/60 R 16.
185/50 R 17.
John Cooper Works: 185/50 R 17.
John Cooper Works GP: 195/45 R 18.
Maximum speed with snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.
Changing wheels/tires
General information When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit. a wheel does not always need to be changed immediately when there is a loss of tire in flation pressure due to a flat tire.
If needed. the tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information
DANGER The vehicle jack is only provided for short term lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if all safety measures are observed. there is a risk of the raised vehi cle falling. if the vehicle jack tips over.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
If the vehicle is raised. do not lie under the vehicle and do not start the engine.
DANGER Supports such as wooden blocks under the vehicle jack reduce the capacity of the ve hicle jack to bear weight. They have the potential to exert too much strain on the vehicle jack. causing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place supports under the vehicle jack.
Warning The jack. issued by the vehicle manufac turer. is provided in order to perform a wheel change in the event of a breakdown.
The jack is not designed for frequent use; for example. changing from summer to winter tires. Using the jack frequently may
Seite 266
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Warning On soft. uneven or slippery ground. for ex ample snow. ice. tiles. etc. the vehicle jack can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If possible. change the wheel on a flat. solid. and slip-resistant surface.
Warning The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehicle and for the jacking points on the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury.
Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.
Warning When the vehicle jack is not inserted into the jacking point provided for this pur pose. the vehicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When cranking up the vehicle jack. ensure that it is inserted in the jacking point next to the wheel housing.
Warning A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. While the ve hicle is raised. do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehi cle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a deal
Securing the vehicle against rolling
General information The vehicle manufacturer recommends to additionally secure the vehicle against roll ing away when changing a wheel.
On a level surface
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in front and behind the wheel that is diago nal to the wheel to be changed.
On a slight downhill gradient
If you need to change a wheel on a slight downhill grade. place chocks and other suit able objects. for instance a rock. under the wheels of both the front and rear axles against the rolling direction.
Seite 267
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Lug bolt lock
Concept The wheel lug bolts have a special coding.
The lug bolts can only be released with the adapter which matches the coding.
Overview The adapter of the lug bolt lock is located in the onboard vehicle tool kit. refer to page 283.
Lug bolt. arrow 1.
Adapter. arrow 2.
Unscrewing 1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug bolt.
Screwing on 1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If necessary. turn the adapter until it fits on the lug bolt.
2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening torque is 140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screwing on the lug bolt.
Preparing the vehicle Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground at a safe distance from traffic.
Switch on the hazard warning system.
Set the parking brake.
Engage a gear or move the selector lever to position P.
As soon as permitted by the traffic flow. have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out side the immediate area in a safe place. such as behind a guardrail.
Depending on the vehicle equipment. get wheel change tools and. if necessary. the emergency wheel from the vehicle.
If necessary. set up a warning triangle or portable hazard warning light at an appropriate distance.
Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling.
Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are located at the marked positions.
Seite 268
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Jacking up the vehicle
Warning Hands and fingers can be jammed when using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Comply with the described hand position and do not change this position while using the vehicle jack.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand. ar row 1. and grasp the vehicle jack crank or lever with your other hand. arrow 2.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectan gular recess of the jacking point closest to the wheel to be changed.
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise.
4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under load and continue turning the vehicle jack crank or lever with one hand.
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and at a right angle be neath the jacking point.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and perpendicularly be neath the jacking point after extending the vehicle jack.
7. Crank the vehicle up. until the vehicle jack is with the entire surface on the
Seite 269
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Rain sensor: position 1.
Normal wiper speed: position 2.
Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Brief wipe and switching off
Press the lever down. Switching off: press the lever down until it reaches its standard position.
Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position.
Rain sensor
Activating/deactivating
To activate: press the lever up once from its standard position. arrow 1.
To deactivate: press the lever back into the standard position.
Set interval or sensitivity of the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
Canada: wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe
Switching on
Tap up the lever or press it past the resist ance point.
Seite 27
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Mounting a wheel Mount one emergency wheel only. as re quired.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on and screw in at least two lug bolts in a crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle manufacturer are mounted. the accompanying lug bolts may have to be used as well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and tighten all lug bolts well in a cross wise pattern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counter clockwise to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehicle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se curely.
After the wheel change 1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area. if necessary.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored under the cargo floor panel because of its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next opportunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the nearest dealer's service center or an
Emergency wheel
Concept In the event of a flat tire. the emergency wheel can be used in place of the wheel with the defective tire. The emergency wheel is only intended for temporary use until the defective tire/wheel has been re placed.
General information Mount one emergency wheel only.
Also check the tire inflation pressure of the emergency wheel in the cargo area regu larly. and correct it as needed.
Safety information
Warning The emergency wheel has particular di mensions. When driving with an emer gency wheel. changed driving properties may occur. for instance reduced lane sta bility when braking. longer braking dis tance. and changed self-steering proper ties in the limit area. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not ex ceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Overview The emergency wheel is housed in a well on the underbody of the vehicle. The screw connection of the emergency wheel is under the cargo floor panel. on the floor of the storage compartment for the onboard vehi cle tool kit.
The wheel change tools are under the cargo floor panel.
Seite 270
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Removing the emergency wheel 1. Loosen the nut using the wheel wrench from the onboard vehicle tool kit.
2. Remove the retaining plate.
3. Screw wheel lug wrench onto the thread and hold in place with one hand.
4. Unlock the locking hexagon of the emer gency wheel well using the hexagon at tached to retaining plate.
5. Lower the emergency wheel with the wheel wrench.
6. Unscrewing the wheel wrench 7. Pull out the well with emergency wheel under the vehicle toward the rear.
8. Remove the spacer and emergency wheel from the well.
9. Stow the well and spacer in the vehicle.
Replacing the tires 1. Have the damaged tire replaced.
2. Replace the emergency wheel with the new wheel.
Installing the emergency wheel Have the emergency wheel installed back into the vehicle by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 271
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available
Overview
Filler neck for washer fluid
Vehicle identification number
Oil filler neck
Jump-starting. positive terminal
Jump-starting. negative terminal
Coolant reservoir
Seite 272
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Hood
Safety information
Warning Improperly executed work in the engine compartment can damage vehicle compo nents and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an accident and damage to property. Have work in the engine com partment performed by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Warning The engine compartment accommodates moving components. Certain components in the engine compartment can also move with the vehicle switched off. for instance the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury.
Do not reach into the area of moving parts.
Keep articles of clothing and hair away from moving parts.
Warning There are protruding parts. for instance locking hook. on the inside of the hood.
There is a risk of injury. If the hood is open. pay attention to protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.
Warning An incorrectly locked hood can open while driving and restrict visibility. There is a risk of accident. Stop immediately and cor rectly close the hood.
Warning Body parts can be jammed when opening and closing the hood. There is a risk of in jury. Make sure that the area of movement of the hood is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam age to property. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.
NOTICE When the hood is closed. it must engage on both sides. Pressing again can damage the hood. There is a risk of damage to property. Open the hood again and then close it energetically. Avoid pressing again.
Opening the hood 1. Pull lever. arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
2. After the lever is released. pull the lever again. arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
Seite 273
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Indicator/warning lights When the hood is opened. a Check Control message is displayed.
Closing the hood
Energetically close the hood from approx.
20 in/50 cm.
The hood must engage on both sides.
Seite 274
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on your driving style and driving conditions.
Therefore. regularly check the engine oil level after refueling by taking a detailed measurement.
The engine oil consumption can increase in the following situations. for instance: Sporty driving style.
Break-in of the engine.
Idling of the engine.
With use of engine oil types that are classified as not suitable.
Different Check Control messages appear. depending on the engine oil level.
Safety information
NOTICE An engine oil level that is too low causes engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Immediately add engine oil.
NOTICE Too much engine oil can damage the en gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine oil is added. have the engine oil level cor rected by a dealer’s service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop.
Electronic oil measurement
General information The electronic oil measurement has two measuring principles: Monitoring.
Detailed measurement.
When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style. for in stance when taking curves aggressively. regularly perform a detailed measurement.
Monitoring
Concept The engine oil level is monitored electroni cally while driving and can be shown on the Control Display.
Seite 275
Engine oil MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
If the engine oil level is outside its permis sible operating range. a Check Control mes sage is displayed.
A red indicator light indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.
Functional requirements A current measured value is available after approx. 30 minutes of normal driving.
Displaying the engine oil level Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
"Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
System limits When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style. it may not be possible to calculate a measured value.
In this case. the measured value for the last. sufficiently long trip is displayed.
Detailed measurement
Concept The engine oil level is checked when the ve hicle is stationary and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level is outside its permis sible operating range. a Check Control mes sage is displayed.
General information During the measurement. the idle speed is increased somewhat.
Functional requirements Vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi tion.
Manual transmission: shift lever in neu tral position. clutch and accelerator ped als not depressed.
Steptronic transmission: selector lever in selector lever position N or P and ac celerator pedal not depressed.
Engine is running and is at operating temperature.
Performing a detailed measurement Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
"Engine oil level"
4. "Measure engine oil level" 5. "Start measurement" The engine oil level is checked and dis played via a scale.
Adding engine oil
General information Only add engine oil when the message is displayed in the instrument cluster. The quantity to be added is indicated in the message displayed in the instrument clus ter.
Only add suitable types of engine oil. refer to page 278.
Safely park the vehicle and switch off the ignition before adding engine oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Seite 276
MOBILITY Engine oil
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Safety information
Warning Operating materials. for instance oils. greases. coolants. fuels. can contain harm ful ingredients. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Follow the instructions on the containers. Avoid the contact of ar ticles of clothing. skin or eyes with operat ing materials. Do not refill operating mate rials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children.
NOTICE An engine oil level that is too low causes engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Immediately add engine oil.
NOTICE Too much engine oil can damage the en gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine oil is added. have the engine oil level cor rected by a dealer’s service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop.
Overview The oil filler neck is located in the engine compartment. refer to page 272.
Adding engine oil 1. Open the hood. refer to page 273.
2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
3. Add engine oil.
4. Close the lid.
Engine oil types to add
General information The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine.
Only add the types of engine oil which are listed.
Safety information
NOTICE Oil additives can damage the engine.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use oil additives.
NOTICE Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk of damage to property. When select ing an engine oil. make sure that the en gine oil has the correct oil rating.
Seite 277
Engine oil MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Suitable engine oil types Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
BMW Longlife-17 FE+.
Alternative engine oil types If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available. up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil with the following oil rating can be added:
Oil rating
API SL.
API SM.
API SN.
Viscosity grades When selecting an engine oil. make sure that the engine oil belongs to one of the fol lowing viscosity grades:
Viscosity grades
SAE 0W-30.
More information about suitable oil ratings and viscosity grades of engine oils can be requested from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Engine oil change
NOTICE Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion can cause increased engine wear and thus engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. It is recommended that you do not exceed the service inter vals indicated in the vehicle.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop change the engine oil.
Seite 278
MOBILITY Engine oil
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Coolant
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle. Do not mix addi tives of different colors. Observe the water additive mixing ratio of 50:50. Information about suitable additives is available from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information
Warning With the engine hot and the cooling sys tem open. coolant can escape and lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling system with the engine cooled down.
Warning Additives are harmful and incorrect addi tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to prop erty. Do not allow additives to come into contact with skin. eyes or articles of cloth ing. Use suitable additives only.
Coolant level
Checking There are yellow Min and Max marks in the coolant reservoir.
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Open the hood. refer to page 273.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate. then open it.
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
Seite 279
Coolant MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once beyond the resistance point.
Brief wipe and switching off
Press the lever down. To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
To switch off normal wipe: press down once.
Brief wipe: press down once.
Rain sensor
Activating/deactivating
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Set interval or sensitivity of the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
Climate control
Air conditioner
Button Function
Temperature.
Air conditioning.
Recirculated-air mode.
Seite 28
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
5. The coolant level is correct if it lies be tween the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck.
6. Close the lid.
Adding coolant 1. Let the engine cool.
2. Open the hood. refer to page 273.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate. then open it.
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
5. If the coolant is low. slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.
6. Close the lid.
7. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environ mental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant ad ditives.
Seite 280
MOBILITY Coolant
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
MINI maintenance system
The maintenance system provides service notifications and thereby provides support in maintaining road safety and the opera tional reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases. scopes and intervals of the maintenance system may vary according to the country version. Replacement work. spare parts. fuels and lubricants. and wear materials are calculated separately. Further information is available from a dealer's serv ice center or another qualified service cen ter or repair shop.
Condition Based Service CBS
Concept Sensors and special algorithms take into ac count the driving conditions of the vehicle.
CBS uses these to calculate the need for maintenance.
The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance corresponding to your user profile.
General information Information on service notifications. refer to page 131. can be displayed on the Control Display.
Service data in the vehicle key Information on the service notifications is continuously stored in the vehicle key. The service center can read this data out and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi cle.
Therefore. hand the service advisor the ve hicle key with which the vehicle was driven most recently.
Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle battery was disconnected are not taken into account.
If this occurs. have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop update the time-dependent mainte nance procedures. such as checking brake fluid and. if necessary. changing the engine oil and the microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Maintenance Manual and Service and Warranty Infor mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
Please consult your Maintenance Manual and Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and
Seite 281
Maintenance MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on the perform ance of service and maintenance work.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom mends that maintenance and repair be per formed by a service center or another quali fied service center or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance and repair work should be retained.
Socket for OBD Onboard Diag nosis
General information Devices connected to the OBD socket trig ger the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Remove any devices connected at the OBD socket before locking the vehicle.
Safety information
NOTICE The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an in tricate component intended to be used in conjunction with specialized equipment to check the vehicle’s primary emissions sys tem. Improper use of the socket for On board Diagnosis. or contact with the socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose. can cause vehi cle malfunctions and creates risks of per sonal and property damage. Given the fore going. the manufacture of your vehicle strongly recommends that access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's service center or another quali fied service center or repair shop or other persons that have the specialized training and equipment for purposes of properly utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehicle's emissions.
Emissions
The warning light lights up: Emissions are deteriorating.
Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The warning light flashes under certain circumstances: This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise. serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control components. in particular the catalytic converter.
Seite 282
MOBILITY Maintenance
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Vehicle tool kit
Depending on the vehicle equipment. the onboard vehicle tool kit is located on the right side under the cargo floor panel or in a bag on the right side of the cargo area.
After use. secure the bag with the onboard vehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.
Wiper blades
Safety information
NOTICE The window may sustain damage if the wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade installed. There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper blade installed.
NOTICE Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam age to property. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.
Replacing the front wiper blades 1. To change the wiper blades. fold up the wiper arms.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Open the wiper blade lock. arrow.
Seite 283
Replacing components MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
4. Pull the wiper blade down out of the holder on the wiper arm. arrow 1.
5. Pull the wiper blade free from the holder of the wiper arm. arrow 2.
6. Insert and latch a new wiper blade in re verse order.
7. Fold down the wiper arm.
Replacing the rear wiper blade 1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back.
3. Push the wiper blade out of the fasten ing by continuing to turn it all the way.
4. Insert the new wiper blade by following the steps in reverse order. The wiper blade must engage audibly.
5. Fold down the wiper arm.
Light and bulb replacement
General information
Lights and bulbs Lights and bulbs make an essential contri bution to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recom mends that you have appropriate work per formed by a dealer’s service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop if you are unfamiliar with it or if it has not been described here.
A spare light box is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Follow the safety information. refer to page 284.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Some items of equipment use light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover as a light source. These light-emitting diodes are re lated to conventional lasers and are offi cially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Follow the safety information. refer to page 284.
Safety information
Lights and bulbs
Warning Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they have cooled off.
Seite 284
MOBILITY Replacing components
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Warning Work on switched-on lighting systems can cause short circuits. There is a risk of in jury or risk of damage to property. When working on the lighting system. switch off the lights in question. If necessary. heed the bulb manufacturer's instructions.
NOTICE Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not hold new bulbs with your bare hands.
Use a clean cloth or something similar. or hold the bulb by its base.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Warning Intensive brightness can irritate or dam age the retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not look directly into the head lights or other light sources. Do not re move the LED covers.
Headlight glass Condensation can form on the inside of the headlight glass in cool or humid weather.
When driving with the lights switched on. the condensation evaporates after a short time. The headlight glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the headlights switched on. increasing humidity forms. for instance water droplets in the light. have the headlights checked.
Headlight setting The headlight adjustments can be affected by changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight adjustment was changed. have it
Front halogen lights. bulb replacement
Overview
Halogen headlights
Low beams/high beams
Turn signal
Low beams/high beams Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs. refer to page 284.
55-watt bulb. HB2.
1. Open the hood. refer to page 273.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise. arrow. and remove.
3. Pull off the connector.
Seite 285
Replacing components MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
4. Unclip spring clip. arrow. and fold down.
5. Remove the bulb from the headlight housing.
6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in the reverse order.
Turn signal Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs. refer to page 284.
21-watt bulb. PY21W.
1. Turn the steering wheel.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise. arrow 1. and remove.
3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclock wise. and remove it.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the bulb housing.
5. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.
6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in the reverse order.
LED front lights. bulb replacement All lights feature LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction. contact a deal er's service center or another qualified serv ice center or repair shop.
LED front fog lights These front fog lights are made using LED technology. In the case of a malfunction. contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 286
MOBILITY Replacing components
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Tail lights. bulb replacement
Overview
Vehicles with a rear fog light
Side tail lights
Rear fog light
License plate light
Center brake light
Vehicle with two rear fog lights
Side tail lights
Rear fog lights
License plate light
Center brake light
Side tail lights
Tail lights
Turn signal
Brake light
Reversing lights
Side tail lights with Union Jack
Tail lights
Turn signals/brake lights
Turn signals/brake lights
Reversing lights
Side tail lights
Without Union Jack Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs. refer to page 284. Bulb. brake lights: H21W.
Bulb. turn signals: P21W.
Seite 287
Replacing components MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Bulb. reversing lights: P21W.
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove left or right cover.
3. Through the opening. loosen the plug connector. arrow 2 on the bulb holder.
Press the latches together. arrows 1. and remove the bulb holder.
4. Remove the bulb holder from the open ing.
5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the socket. turn counterclockwise and remove. Arrow 1: brake lights
Arrow 2: turn signal
Arrow 3: reversing light
6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder.
Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fasteners.
With Union Jack Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs. refer to page 284.
Bulb. reversing lights: P21W.
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove left or right cover.
3. Turn the bulb holder for the reversing light. arrow. counterclockwise and re move it.
Seite 288
MOBILITY Replacing components
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
4. Remove the bulb holder from the open ing.
5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the socket. turn counterclockwise and remove.
6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder.
Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fasteners.
Central brake light and license plate lights Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs. refer to page 284.
The lights feature LED technology. In the case of a malfunction. contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Side turn signal. bulb replacement Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs. refer to page 284.
Bulbs:
With white lens: WY5W.
1. Open the hood. The covers of the side turn signal lights are on the left and right next to the hinges of the hood.
2. Loosen the nuts of the cover by hand or with the onboard vehicle tool kit. refer to page 283. and remove the cover.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
4. Replace the bulb.
5. To insert the new bulb. proceed in re verse order of removal.
Insert the nuts of the cover and press down.
Seite 289
Replacing components MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Button Function
Controls the air flow. manual.
Controls the air distribution manually.
Windshield defroster.
Automatic climate control
Button Function
Temperature.
Air conditioning.
Maximum cooling.
AUTO program.
Recirculated-air mode.
Controls the air flow. manual.
Air distribution. manual.
Defrosts and defogs the windows.
Button Function
Windshield defroster.
Rear window defroster.
Refueling stop
Refueling
Fuel cap 1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge and open it.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at tached to the fuel filler flap.
Gasoline For the best fuel efficiency. the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without metallic additives.
Information on the recommended fuel grade can be found in the Owner's Manual.
Seite 29
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Side scuttles
Individual side scuttles for clicking into the side turn signals are available as original MINI accessories.
Follow the assembly instructions.
Vehicle battery
General information The battery is maintenance-free.
More information about the battery can be requested from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information
Warning Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an ac cident and damage to property. Only vehi cle batteries that are compatible with your vehicle type should be installed in your ve hicle. Information on compatible vehicle batteries is available at your dealer’s serv ice center.
Register the battery to the vehicle The manufacturer of the vehicle recom mends that you have a service center or an
Charging the battery
General information Make sure that the battery is always suffi ciently charged to guarantee that the bat tery remains usable for its full service life.
A discharged battery is indicated by a red indicator light.
Charge the battery in the following situa tions: When the inspection glass on the top of the battery is black.
When the take-off performance is insuf ficient.
The following circumstances can have a negative effect on the performance of the battery: Frequent short-distance drives.
The vehicle is not used for more than a month.
Safety information
NOTICE Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents. which means that the 12 volt on-board network can be overloaded or damaged.
There is a risk of damage to property. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment.
Seite 290
MOBILITY Replacing components
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Charging the battery Charge the battery only when the engine is off and via the starting aid terminals. refer to page 295. in the engine compartment.
Power failure After a power loss. some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual settings updated. for example: Memory function: store the positions again.
Time: update.
Date: update.
Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the filled battery in an upright po sition for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Safety information
Warning Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload electrical lines and components. There is a risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating.
Accessing the fuses The fuses are located in the glove compart ment.
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Swing the cover down. arrow.
Information on the fuse types and locations. as well as the positions of any other fuse boxes. is available on the Internet: www.mini.com/fusecard.
Where applicable. information on the fuse types and locations is also found on a sepa rate sheet in the fuse box.
Replacing fuses The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop replace the fuses.
Seite 291
Replacing components MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located above the Control Dis play.
The red light in the button flashes when the hazard warning flashers are activated.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located in the tail gate. To remove. loosen the brackets.
First-aid kit
General information Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly.
Storage The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area.
MINI Roadside Assistance
Concept MINI Roadside Assistance can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a breakdown.
Seite 292
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
General information In the event of a breakdown. data on the ve hicle's condition is sent to the vehicle man ufacturer.
There are various ways of making contact. Via a Check Control message. refer to page 125.
Calling with a mobile phone.
Requirements Active MINI Connected contract or equipment version with intelligent emergency call.
Cellular network reception.
The ignition is switched on.
Starting If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices. support is offered through Teleservice Diag nosis.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"MINI Connected"
2. "MINI Assist" 3. "MINI Roadside Assistance" The contact to the Roadside Assistance of the manufacture is established.
A telephone number is displayed. if needed. Select to dial the telephone number on a connected mobile phone.
Teleservice Diagnosis Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that is important for vehicle diagnosis. This data is transmitted automatically.
Teleservice Help Depending on the country. the Teleservice Help enables a more in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle via wireless transmission.
You can launch Teleservice Help by re questing it through the Service Specialist.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Control Display is switched on.
4. Confirm Teleservice Help.
The driving ability of the vehicle can be re stored for specific functions.
If this is not possible. further measures will be initiated. for instance Roadside Assis tance will be informed.
Emergency Request
Intelligent emergency call
Concept In case of an emergency. an Emergency Re quest can be triggered automatically by the system or manually.
General information Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
The Intelligent Assist system establishes a connection with the MINI Response Center.
For technical reasons. the Emergency Re quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavora ble conditions.
Seite 293
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Overview
SOS button in the roofliner
Functional requirements The ignition is switched on.
The Assist system is functional.
If the vehicle is equipped with intelli gent emergency call: the SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been acti vated.
Automatic triggering Under certain conditions. for instance if the airbags trigger. an Emergency Request is automatically initiated immediately after an accident of corresponding severity. Auto matic Collision Notification is not affected by pressing the SOS button.
Manual triggering 1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the button lights up green.
The LED is illuminated green when an Emergency Request has been initiated.
If the situation allows. wait in your vehi cle until the voice connection has been established.
The LED flashes green when a connec tion to the MINI Response Center has been established.
The MINI Response Center then makes contact with you and takes further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond. the MINI Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circum stances.
For this purpose. data that serves to de termine the necessary rescue measures. for instance the current position of the vehicle when it can be determined. is transmitted to the MINI Response Cen ter.
If you can no longer hear the MINI Re sponse Center through the loudspeakers. the hands-free system. for instance. may be broken. However. the MINI Response Center may still be able to hear you.
The MINI Response Center ends the Emer gency Request.
Jump-starting
General information If the battery is discharged. the engine can be started using the battery of another vehi cle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles.
Safety information
DANGER Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of inju ries or danger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage.
Seite 294
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Warning If the jumper cables are connected in the incorrect order. sparking may occur. There is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the cor rect order during connection.
NOTICE In the case of body contact between the two vehicles. a short circuit can occur dur ing jump-starting. There is a risk of dam age to property. Make sure that no body contact occurs.
Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles.
Starting aid terminals
The starting aid terminal in the engine com partment acts as the battery's positive ter minal.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles. adhere strictly to the follow ing procedure.
1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid termi nal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the posi tive jumper cable to the positive termi nal of the battery. or to the correspond ing starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery. or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the nega tive jumper cable to the negative termi nal of the battery. or to the correspond ing engine or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative terminal of the battery. or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.
Seite 295
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not suc cessful. wait a few minutes before mak ing another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several mi nutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re verse order.
Check the battery and recharge. if needed.
Tow-starting and towing
Safety information
Warning Due to system limits. individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/ towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Steptronic transmission with driven front axle: transporting the vehicle
General information The vehicle must not be towed if the front wheels are touching the ground.
Safety information
NOTICE The vehicle can be damaged when towing the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is a risk of damage to property. Have vehicle transported only with lifted front axle or on a loading platform.
Pushing the vehicle To remove a broken-down vehicle from the danger area. it can be pushed for a short distance.
For rolling or pushing the vehicle. refer to page 117.
Tow truck
Your vehicle should be transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
NOTICE The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property. Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow fitting. body parts. or suspension parts.
Seite 296
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Manual transmission
Towing or pushing the vehicle A broken-down vehicle can be towed or pushed.
For rolling or pushing the vehicle. refer to page 114.
NOTICE If manual unlocking of the parking brake is not possible. the vehicle cannot be moved or towed. There is a risk of damage to property. The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform.
Follow the following instructions: Make sure that the ignition is switched on; otherwise. the low beams. tail lights. turn signals. and wipers may be unavail able.
Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted. as the front wheels could turn.
When the engine is stopped. there is no power assist. Consequently. more force needs to be applied when braking and steering.
Larger steering wheel movements are required.
The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise. it will not be possible to control the ve hicle's response.
Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/50 km/h.
Do not exceed a towing distance of 30 miles/50 km.
Tow truck
With driven front axle
Your vehicle should be transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
NOTICE The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property. Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow fitting. body parts. or suspension parts.
Towing other vehicles
General information Switch on the hazard warning system. de pending on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed. clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win dow.
Seite 297
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Safety information
Warning If the approved gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be towed. the tow fitting can tear off or it will not be possible to control the vehi cle's response. There is a risk of accident.
Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier than the ve hicle to be towed.
NOTICE If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in correctly. damage to other vehicle parts can occur. There is a risk of damage to property. Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.
Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mount ing the tow bar at an offset angle. please fol low the following: Maneuvering capability is limited going around corners.
The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset.
Tow rope Observe the following notes when using the tow rope: Use nylon ropes or straps. which will en able the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when fastening.
Check the fastening of the tow fitting and tow rope in regular intervals.
Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/50 km/h.
Do not exceed a towing distance of 3 miles/5 km.
When starting to tow the vehicle. make sure that the tow rope is taut.
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit. refer to page 283. are together in the cargo area.
Use of the tow fitting: Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only.
Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting. for instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Check the fastening of the tow fitting in regular intervals.
Seite 298
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Safety information
NOTICE If the tow fitting is not used as intended. there may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to property. Follow the notes on using the tow fitting.
Screw thread for tow fitting
Threaded holes for the tow fitting are lo cated in the front and rear of the vehicle on the right side with respect to the direction of travel.
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to the Steptronic transmission.
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties corrected by a dealer’s service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop.
Manual transmission If possible. do not tow-start the vehicle but start the engine by jump-starting. refer to page 294. If the vehicle is equipped with a
1. Switch on the hazard warning system and comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition. refer to page 98.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch pedal pressed and slowly release the pedal. After the engine starts. imme diately press on the clutch pedal again.
5. Stop at a suitable location. remove the tow bar or rope. and switch off the haz ard warning system.
6. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified serv ice center or repair shop.
Seite 299
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure specifications
For 5-door models: The tire inflation pressure values can be found on the sign on the door pillar.
For 3-door models: The tire inflation pressure values can be found on the sign on the door pillar.
Checking the tire inflation pressure Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and correct it as needed: At least twice a month.
Before embarking on an extended trip.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Electronic oil measurement
Requirements A current measured value is available after approx. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter trip. the status of the last. suffi ciently long trip is displayed.
Displaying the engine oil level Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
"Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
Adding engine oil
General information Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehicle before engine oil is added.
Adding engine oil
Only add engine oil when the message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Observe the quantity to be added in the message.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Observe recommended engine oil types.
Seite 30
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Care
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Washing the vehicle
General information Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently. particularly in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the vehicle.
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
Safety information
NOTICE When cleaning with high-pressure wash ers. components can be damaged due to the pressure or temperatures being too high. There is a risk of damage to property.
Maintain sufficient distance and do not spray too long continuously. Follow the operating instructions for the high-pres sure washer.
NOTICE In the John Cooper Works GP. water may penetrate into the engine compartment when washing the underbody. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not wash the underbody for the John Cooper Works GP;
Distances and temperature Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
Minimum distance from sensors. cam eras. seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
Minimum distance from glass sunroof: 31.5 in/80 cm.
Automatic vehicle washes
Safety information
NOTICE In the case of the John Cooper Works GP. vehicle parts can be damaged in a car wash. for instance the rear spoiler. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not drive through a car wash.
NOTICE Water can penetrate in the windshield area due to high-pressure washers. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not drive into high-pressure car wash systems.
Seite 300
MOBILITY Care
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Providing assistance
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located above the Control Dis play.
Breakdown assistance
MINI Roadside Assistance This service can be reached around the clock in many countries.
"MINI Connected"
2. "MINI Assist" 3. "MINI Roadside Assistance" The contact to the MINI Roadside Assis tance is established.
A telephone number is displayed. if needed. Select to dial the telephone number on a connected mobile phone.
Seite 31
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
Power windows 77
Exterior mirror operation 88
Buttons of the central locking sys tem 67
Lights
Front fog lights 147
Light switch 144
Lights off Daytime running lights 146
Parking lights 144
Low beams 144
Seite 32
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Automatic headlight con trol 145 Cornering light 146 High-beam Assistant 146
Instrument lighting 148
Steering wheel buttons. left
Camera-based cruise control on/off 178
Cruise control on/off 185
Speed Limiter 168
Cruise control: to store the speed
Pausing. continuing cruise control
Cruise control: increase speed
Cruise control: reduce speed
Camera-based cruise control: reduce distance
Camera-based cruise control: increase distance
Steering column stalk. left
Turn signal 104
High beams. head light flasher 104
High-beam Assistant 146
Roadside parking lights 145
Onboard Computer 135
Instrument cluster 122
Steering column stalk. right
Wipers 105 Wiper on Canadian mod els 109
Rain sensor 106 Rain sensor on Canadian mod els 109
Cleaning windows 107
Rear window wiper in Cana dian models 107
Rear window wiper 107
Clean the rear window 107
Steering wheel buttons. right
Voice activation 44
Telephone
Confirm the selection 134
Move selection up 134
Move selection down 134
Seite 33
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Increase volume
Reduce volume
Horn. entire surface
11 Adjusting the steering wheel 90 12 Unlocking the hood 273
In the vicinity of the center console
Hazard warning system 292
Intelligent Safety 161
Control Display 36
Radio/Multimedia
Glove compartment 219
Climate control 199
PDC Park Distance Con trol 187 Rearview camera 191 Parking assistant 194
Auto Start/Stop func tion 101
Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/ off 98
Seite 34
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
MINI Driving Modes switch 176
Steptronic transmission selector lever 114 Manual transmission gearshift lever 113
Controller with buttons 38
Parking brake 104
In the vicinity of the roofliner
Emergency Request.
SOS 293
Indicator light. front-seat pas senger airbag 153
Reading lights 148
Ambient light 148
Panoramic glass sunroof 79
Interior lights 148
Seite 35
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Central Information Display (CID)
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Concept
The Central Information Display (CID) com bines the functions of a multitude of switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller.
Safety information
Warning Operating the integrated information sys tems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is pos sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows.
As warranted. stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.
Input and display
Letters and numbers Depending on the menu. you can switch be tween entering upper and lower case let ters. numbers and characters:
Symbol Function
Change between capital and lower-case letters.
Insert blank space.
Use voice activation.
Confirm entry.
Without navigation system
Select the symbol.
Entry comparison When entering names and addresses. the choice is narrowed down with every letter entered and letters may be added automati cally.
Entries are continuously compared with data stored in the vehicle. Only those letters are offered during en try for which data is available.
Destination search: place names can be entered in all languages that are availa ble on the Control Display.
Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a checkbox. The checkbox indicates whether the function is activated or deactivated. Se lecting the menu item activates or deacti vates the function.
Seite 36
AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Status information
General information The status field can be found in the upper area of the Control Display. Status informa tion is displayed in the form of symbols.
Radio
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being re ceived.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Signal strength of cellular net work.
Symbol flashes: network search.
Cellular network is not available.
Roaming is active.
SMS text message received.
Message received.
Reminder.
Sending not possible.
Entertainment
Symbol Meaning
Bluetooth audio.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Other symbols
Symbol Meaning
Check Control message.
The sound output has been switched off.
Encrypted connection not ac tive.
Request for the current vehicle position.
Checking the current vehicle po sition.
Split screen
General information Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen. for in stance information from the Onboard Com puter.
In the divided screen view. the so-called split screen. this information remains visi ble even when switching to another menu.
Switching the split screen on/off
Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
Seite 37
Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Selecting the display The display can be selected in menus which support the split screen function.
1. Move the Controller to the right until the split screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. Select the desired setting.
Specifying the number of displays It is possible to specify the number of dis plays.
1. Move the Controller to the right until the split screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. "Personalize menu" 4. Select the desired setting.
5. Move the Controller to the left.
Control elements
Overview
Control Display with touchscreen
Controller with buttons
Control Display
General information To clean the Control Display. follow the care instructions. refer to page 304.
In the case of very high temperatures on the Control Display. for instance due to in tense solar radiation. the brightness may be reduced down to complete deactivation.
Once the temperature is reduced. for in stance through shade or air conditioning. the normal functions are restored.
Safety information
NOTICE Objects in the area in the front of the Con trol Display can shift and damage the Con trol Display. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not place objects in the area in front of the Control Display.
Switching on/off automatically The Control Display is switched on automat ically when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the Control Display is needed for operation.
In certain situations. the Control Display is switched off automatically. for instance if no operation is performed on the vehicle for several minutes.
Switching on/off manually The Control Display can also be switched off manually.
Press the button.
2. "Turn off control display" Press the Controller or any button on the Controller to switch it back on again.
Controller with navigation system
General information The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The Controller can be used to se lect menu items and enter the settings.
Seite 38
AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Operation Turn to switch between menu items. for example.
Press to select a menu item. for example.
Tilt in four directions to switch between displays. for example.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: calls up the main menu.
Press twice: open recently used menus.
Opens the Communication menu.
Opens the Media/Radio menu.
Opens destination input menu for navigation.
Opens navigation map.
Opens the previous display.
Opens the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system
General information The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The Controller can be used to se lect menu items and enter the settings.
Operation Turn to switch between menu items. for example.
Seite 39
Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Press to select a menu item. for example.
Tilt in two directions to switch between displays. for example.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: calls up the main menu.
Press twice: open recently used menus.
Opens the Communication menu.
Opens the Media/Radio menu.
Opens the previous display.
Opens the Options menu.
Operating via the Controller
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
All Central Information Display (CID) func tions can be called up via the main menu.
Selecting menu items Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
Adjusting menu contents The display of menus "Media/Radio". "Communication" and "MINI Connected" can be adjusted. for instance to remove the en tries of functions that are not used from the menu.
Seite 40
AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Via Central Information Display (CID):
1. Select the menu.
2. "Personalize menu" 3. Select desired menu contents to be dis played.
Changing between displays After a menu item is selected. for instance "System settings". a new display appears. Move the Controller to the left.
The current display closes and the previ ous display is shown.
Press the button.
The previous display re-opens.
Move the Controller to the right.
The new display opens.
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened.
Opening recently used menus The recently used menus can be displayed.
Press the button twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
The menu consists of various areas. for in stance: "Split screen": screen settings.
"Media/Radio": control options for the selected main menu.
"Save station": if applicable. further con trol options for the selected menu.
Entering letters and numbers
Input 1. Turn the Controller: select letters or numbers.
: confirm entry.
Deleting
Symbol Function
Press the Controller: delete letters or number.
Hold the Controller down: de lete all letters or numbers.
Using alphabetical lists For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en tries. the letters for which there is an entry are displayed at the left edge.
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.
All letters for which there are entries are displayed on the left edge.
2. Select the first letter of the desired en try.
The first entry of the selected letter is displayed.
Operation via touchscreen
General information The Control Display is equipped with a touchscreen.
Touch the screen with your fingers. Do not use any objects.
Opening the main menu
Tap on the symbol.
Seite 41
Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
The main menu is displayed.
All Central Information Display (CID) func tions can be called up via the main menu.
Selecting menu items Tap the desired menu item.
Changing between displays After a menu item is selected. a new display opens.
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened. Swipe to the left.
Tap arrow.
The new display opens.
Opening recently used menus
Tap on the symbol.
Tap on the symbol.
Entering letters and numbers
Input
Tap the symbol on the touchscreen.
A keyboard is displayed on the Control Display.
2. Enter desired letters and numbers.
Deleting
Symbol Function
Tapping the symbol: deletes the letter or number.
Tapping and holding the symbol all letters: deletes all letters or numbers.
Operating navigation map The navigation map can be moved using the touchscreen.
Function Operation
Enlarge/shrink map.
Drag in or out with the fingers.
Programmable memory but tons
General information The Central Information Display (CID) func tions can be stored on the programmable memory buttons and called up directly. for instance radio stations. navigation destina tions. phone numbers and menu entries.
Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.
Seite 42
AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Storing a function 1. Select the function via the Central Infor mation Display (CID).
Press and hold the desired but ton. until a signal sounds.
Executing a function
Press the button.
The function will work immediately.
This means. for instance that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects.
The assignment of the buttons is displayed in the upper area of the Control Display.
Deleting the button assignments 1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
Seite 43
Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Concept
Most functions displayed on the Control Display can be operated by voice commands via the voice activation system. The system supports you with announcements during input.
General information
Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary can only be op erated via the voice activation system to a limited extent.
The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side.
› ‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes ver bal instructions to use with the voice ac tivation system.
Functional requirements
A language must be set via the Control Display that is supported by the voice
Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system.
Using the voice activation sys tem
Activating the voice activation system
Press the button on the steering wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol indicates that the voice ac tivation system is active.
No other commands may be available. In this case. operate the function via the Cen tral Information Display (CID).
Terminating the voice activation system
Press the button on the steering wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
General information Most menu items on the Control Display can be spoken as commands.
Commands from other menus can also be spoken.
You can also select list entries such as phone list entries via voice activation. Read
Seite 44
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Displaying possible commands The following is displayed in the top area of the Control Display: Some possible commands for the current menu.
Some possible commands from other menus.
Status of the voice recognition.
Encrypted connection is not availa ble.
Help on the voice activation system ›General information on voice control‹: have information on the operating prin ciple of the voice activation system read out loud.
›Help‹: have help for the current menu read out loud.
Example: opening the tone set tings
The commands of the menu items are spo ken just as they are selected via the Con troller.
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound out put. if needed.
Press the button on the steering wheel.
3. ›Media and radio‹ 4. ›Tone‹
Adjusting
Setting the language The language to be used for voice activation and system announcements can be set.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. If necessary. "Language" 4. "Language:" 5. Select the desired language.
Setting the voice dialog You can set the system to use standard dia log or a short version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays back short messages in abbreviated form.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Language" 4. "Speech mode:" 5. Select the desired setting.
Speaking during voice output It is possible to answer during inquiries of the voice activation system. The function can be deactivated if inquiries are often un desirably interrupted. for instance due to background noise or conversations in the vehicle.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language" 4. "Speaking during voice output"
Seite 45
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Activating voice recognition via the server The voice recognition feature via the server provides a dictation function and a natural method of entering destinations while im proving the quality of voice recognition. To use the functions. data is transmitted to a service provider via an encrypted connec tion and stored locally there.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Language" 4. "Server speech recognition"
Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button during the spoken instructions until the desired volume is set. The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed.
The volume is stored for the profile cur rently used.
Information on Emergency Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations. the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the es tablishment of a phone connection.
Instead. use the SOS button. refer to page 293. close to the interior mirror.
System limits
Certain noises can be detected and may lead to problems. Keep the doors. win dows. and glass sunroof closed.
Noises from the front passenger or the rear seat bench can impair the system.
Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
Major language dialects can cause prob lems with the voice recognition feature.
Speak loud and clear.
Using the voice activation sys tem of the smartphone
A smartphone connected to the vehicle can be used via voice activation.
Activate voice command response on the smartphone for this purpose.
Press and hold the button on the steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
Voice command response is activated on the smartphone.
Release the button.
If activation is successful. a confirma tion appears on the Control Display.
If it was not possible to activate voice com mand response. the list of Bluetooth devices appears on the Control Display.
Amazon Alexa Car Integration
Concept Alexa is a digital voice-controlled assistant by Amazon. With Amazon Alexa Car Inte gration. Alexa can be used in the vehicle.
Seite 46
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
General information Some of the Alexa functions are limited in the vehicle to prevent any impairment of safety while driving.
Functional requirements Connected Voice Services purchased via MINI Connected Store.
Same MINI Connected account used in the vehicle and in the MINI Connected app.
Vehicle added in the MINI Connected app.
Amazon account and MINI account con nected in the MINI Connected app.
Smartphone connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth or USB.
Activation in the MINI Connected app The Amazon Alexa Car Integration is acti vated in the MINI Connected app.
Follow the instructions in the app.
Activation in the vehicle An authorization for the use of Amazon Alexa Car Integration is required every time before starting a trip.
1. Authorizing Amazon Alexa Car Integra tion: Connect the smartphone to the vehi cle via Bluetooth.
Selects appropriate driver profile. re fer to page 71.
Press the button on the steering wheel.
3. Wait for the signal.
4. Say activation word ›Alexa‹ and desired command.
Information about the active function is displayed on the Control Display.
Malfunction In case of a malfunction. switch off the en gine and start the engine again.
Seite 47
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
General settings
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Language
Setting the language Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. If necessary. "Language" 4. "Language:" 5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.
Setting the voice dialog For voice dialog for the voice activation sys tem. refer to page 45.
Time
Setting the time zone Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Date and time" 4. "Time zone:" 5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.
Setting the time Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Date and time" 4. "Time:" 5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi nutes are displayed.
8. Press the Controller.
Setting the time format Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Date and time"
4. "Time format:" 5. Select the desired setting.
Seite 48
AT A GLANCE General settings
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.
Date
Setting the date Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Date and time" 4. "Date:" 5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Make the settings for the month and year.
Setting the date format Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Date and time" 4. "Date format:" 5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.
Setting the units of measure ment
You can set the units of measurement for some values. for example. consumption. dis tances and temperature.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Units" 4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.
Activating/deactivating the display of the current vehicle position
Concept If vehicle tracking has been activated. the current vehicle position can be displayed in the MINI Connected app.
Activating/deactivating Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Vehicle tracking" 4. "Vehicle tracking" 5. Select the desired setting.
Activating/deactivating popup windows
For some functions. popup windows are dis played automatically on the Control Display.
Some of these popup windows can be acti vated or deactivated.
Seite 49
General settings AT A GLANCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Pop-ups" 4. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.
Control Display
Brightness Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays" 4. "Control display" 5. "Brightness at night" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired brightness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.
Depending on the light conditions. the brightness settings may not be clearly visi ble.
Screensaver If no entries are made via the Central Infor mation Display (CID). a screensaver can be displayed after an adjustable time.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Control display"
5. "Screensaver" 6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.
Messages
Concept The menu centrally displays all messages ar riving in the vehicle in list form.
General information The following messages can be displayed: Traffic messages.
Communication messages. for example e-mails. SMS text messages or remind ers.
Check Control messages.
Messages on service notifications.
Messages from the vehicle manufac turer.
Messages are additionally displayed in the status field.
Retrieving messages Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
The menu in which the message is dis played will open.
Deleting messages All messages. except Check Control mes sages or messages from the vehicle manu facturer. can be deleted from the list.
Check Control messages or messages from the vehicle manufacturer are displayed as long as they are relevant.
Seite 50
AT A GLANCE General settings
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
Press the button.
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all notifications"
Adjusting The following settings can be adjusted: Select the applications. from which mes sages will be permitted.
Sort the messages according to date or priority.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Notifications" 4. Select the desired setting.
Data protection
Data transfer
Concept The vehicle offers various functions which require data to be transferred to MINI or a service provider. The data transfer can be deactivated for some functions.
General information With data transfer deactivated. the respec tive function cannot be used.
Only make these settings while stationary.
Activating/deactivating Follow the instructions on the Control Dis play.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Data privacy" 4. Select the desired setting.
Deleting personal data in the vehicle
Concept Depending on the usage. the vehicle stores personal data. such as stored radio stations.
This personal data can be permanently de leted via the Central Information Display (CID).
General information Depending on the vehicle equipment. the following data is deleted: Driver profile settings.
Stored radio stations.
Stored programmable memory buttons.
Travel and Onboard Computer informa tion.
Music hard disk.
Navigation. for instance stored destina tions.
Phone book.
Office data. for instance voice notes.
Login accounts.
Altogether. the deletion of the data can take up to 15 minutes.
Functional requirement Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data Note and follow the instructions on the Con trol Display.
Seite 51
General settings AT A GLANCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Data privacy" 4. "Delete personal data" 5. "Delete personal data" 6. "OK" 7. Exit and lock the vehicle.
The deletion process takes 15 minutes to complete.
If not all data was deleted. repeat the dele tion.
Canceling deletion Start the engine to cancel deletion of the data.
Connections
Concept Various connection types are available for using mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection type to select depends on the mobile device and the desired function.
General information The following overview shows possible functions and the suitable connection types for them. The scope of functions depends on the mobile device.
Function Connec tion type
Making calls via the hands free system.
Using phone functions via the Central Information Dis play (CID).
Using the smartphone Of fice functions.
Bluetooth.
Playing music from the smartphone or the audio player.
Bluetooth or USB.
Using compatible apps via the Central Information Dis play (CID).
Bluetooth or USB.
USB storage device: Exporting and importing driver profiles.
Update the software.
Playing music.
USB.
Playing videos from the smartphone or the USB de vice.
USB.
Using Apple CarPlay apps via the Central Information Display (CID) and voice op eration.
Bluetooth and WLAN.
The following connection types require one time pairing with the vehicle: Bluetooth.
Apple CarPlay
Paired devices are automatically recognized later on and connected to the vehicle.
Seite 52
AT A GLANCE General settings
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Safety information
Warning Operating the integrated information sys tems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is pos sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows.
As warranted. stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.
Compatible devices
General information Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed or deviating software versions.
Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number When looking for compatible devices. you may have to state the vehicle identification number and the software part number.
These numbers can be displayed in the ve hicle.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings" 5. "Bluetooth info" 6. "System information" A software update. refer to page 58. can be performed.
Bluetooth connection
Functional requirements Compatible device. refer to page 53. with Bluetooth interface.
The vehicle key is in the vehicle.
The device is ready for operation.
Bluetooth is activated on the device and in the vehicle. refer to page 53.
Bluetooth presettings. such as visibility. may be required on the device; refer to the owner's manual of the device.
Switching on Bluetooth Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings" 5. "Bluetooth"
Activating/deactivating telephone functions To use all supported functions of a mobile phone. the following functions must be acti vated prior to pairing.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings" 5. Select the desired setting:
"Office" Activate function to transmit short messages. e-mails. calendars. tasks. notes. and reminders to the vehicle.
Costs can be incurred by transmit ting all data to the vehicle.
"Contact images" Activate function to show the con tact pictures.
6. Move the Controller to the left.
Seite 53
General settings AT A GLANCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Pairing the mobile device with the vehicle Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Connect new device" 5. Select the functions for which the de vice will be used:
"Telephone"
"Bluetooth audio"
"Apps"
"Apple CarPlay"
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis played on the Control Display.
6. On the mobile device. search for Blue tooth devices in the vicinity.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap pears on the mobile device display.
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehi cle.
7. Depending on the mobile device. a con trol number is displayed or the control number must be entered. Compare the control number dis played on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the device and on the Control Display.
Enter and confirm the same control number on the device and via the Central Information Display (CID).
The device is connected and displayed in the device list.
If connection was not successful: Fre quently Asked Questions. refer to page 54.
Frequently Asked Questions All requirements are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order.
Despite that. the mobile device does not function as expected.
In this case. the following explanations can help: Why could the mobile phone not be paired or connected? There are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone or vehi cle.
In the vehicle. delete Bluetooth connec tions with other devices.
Delete all known Bluetooth connections from the device list on the mobile phone and start a new device search.
The mobile phone is in power-save mode or has only a limited remaining battery life.
Charge the mobile phone.
Why does the mobile phone no longer re act? The applications on the mobile phone do not function anymore.
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
Possibly too high or too low ambient temperatures for mobile phone opera tion.
Do not subject the mobile phone to ex treme ambient temperatures.
Why can phone functions not be used via the Central Information Display (CID)? The mobile phone may not be properly configured. for instance as Bluetooth au dio device.
Connect the mobile phone with the tele phone or additional phone function.
Why are no or not all phone book entries displayed or why are they incomplete?
Seite 54
AT A GLANCE General settings
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Transmission of the phone book entries is not yet complete.
It is possible that only the phone book entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transmitted.
It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.
It may not be possible to transmit con tacts from social networks.
The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high.
Data volume of the contact too large. for instance due to stored information such as notes.
Reduce the data volume of the contact.
A mobile phone is only connected as an audio source.
Reconfigure the mobile phone and con nect it with the telephone or additional phone function.
How can the phone connection quality be improved? The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the mobile phone can be adjusted. de pending on the mobile phone.
Insert the mobile phone into the wire less charging tray.
Adjust the volume of the microphone and loudspeakers separately.
If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not availa ble. contact the hotline. a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
USB connection
General information The following mobile devices can be con nected to the USB port: Mobile phones.
Audio devices with USB port. for in stance MP3 players.
USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported.
FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended formats.
A connected USB storage device will be supplied with charge current via the USB port if the device supports this. Follow the maximum charge current of the USB port.
The following uses are possible on USB ports with data transfer: Exporting and importing driver profiles. refer to page 71.
Playing music files via USB audio.
Playing videos via USB video.
Loading of software updates. refer to page 58.
Follow the following when connecting: Do not use force when plugging the con nector into the USB port.
Use a flexible adapter cable.
Protect the USB storage device against mechanical damage.
Due to the large number of USB storage devices available on the market. it can not be guaranteed that every device is operable on the vehicle.
Do not expose USB storage devices to extreme environmental conditions. such as very high temperatures; refer to the owner's manual of the device.
Due to the many different compression techniques. proper playback of the me dia stored on the USB storage device cannot be guaranteed in all cases.
To ensure proper transmission of the stored data. do not charge a USB storage device via the onboard socket. when it is connected to the USB port.
Depending on how the USB storage de vice is being used. settings may be re
Seite 55
General settings AT A GLANCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Not compatible USB media: USB hard drives.
USB hubs.
USB memory card readers with multiple slots.
HFS-formatted USB storage devices.
Devices such as fans or lamps.
Functional requirement Compatible device. refer to page 53. with USB port.
Connecting the device Connect the USB device using a suitable adapter cable to a USB port. refer to page 215.
The USB device is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list.
Apple CarPlay preparation
Concept CarPlay allows certain functions of a com patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation and the Central Information Display (CID).
Functional requirements Compatible iPhone. refer to page 53. iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
Corresponding mobile contract.
Bluetooth. WLAN. and Siri voice opera tion are activated on the iPhone.
Booking the MINI Connected service: Apple CarPlay preparation.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings" 5. Select the following settings:
"Bluetooth"
"Apple CarPlay"
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay Pairing an iPhone with the vehicle. refer to page 54. via Bluetooth Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay" The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list. refer to page 57.
Operation For more information. refer to the Integrated Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navigation. Entertainment. Com munication.
Frequently Asked Questions All requirements are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order.
Despite that. the mobile device does not function as expected.
In this case. the following explanations can help: The iPhone has already been paired with Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is established. CarPlay can no longer be se lected. Delete the iPhone concerned from the device list.
Seite 56
AT A GLANCE General settings
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
On the iPhone. delete the vehicle con cerned from the list of stored vehicles under Bluetooth and under WLAN.
Pair the iPhone as a new device.
If the steps listed have been carried out and the required function is still not available: contact the hotline. a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Managing mobile devices
General information After one-time pairing. the devices are automatically recognized and recon nected when the ignition is switched on.
The data stored on the SIM card or in the mobile phone is transferred to the vehicle after recognition.
For some devices. certain settings may be necessary. for instance authorization. see owner's manual of the device.
Displaying the device list All devices paired and/or connected with the vehicle are displayed in the device list.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" A symbol indicates. for which function a de vice is used.
Symbol Function
"Telephone"
"Additional telephone"
"Bluetooth audio"
"Apps"
"Apple CarPlay"
Configuring the device Functions can be activated or deactivated for paired and connected devices.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. Select the desired device.
5. Select the desired setting.
If a function is assigned to a device. the function will be deactivated where appro priate for a device that is already connected and the device will be disconnected.
Disconnecting the device The device's connection to the vehicle is disconnected.
The device remains paired and can be con nected again. refer to page 57.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. Select device.
5. "Disconnect device"
Connecting the device A disconnected device can be reconnected.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. Select device.
5. "Connect device" The functions that were assigned to the de vice before disconnecting are assigned to the device when it is reconnected. The func
Seite 57
General settings AT A GLANCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Deleting the device Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. Select device.
5. "Delete device" The device is disconnected and removed from the device list.
Swapping the telephone and additional phone If two mobile phones are connected to the vehicle. the functions of the phone and ad ditional phone can be switched.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings" 5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."
Software update
General information The vehicle supports a large number of mo bile devices. for example mobile phones and MP3 players. Software updates are available for many of the supported devices. The ve hicle is kept up-to-date via regular vehicle software updates.
Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop for information on available software updates.
Displaying the version of the installed software The software version installed in the vehicle is displayed.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "System settings" 3. "Software update" 4. "Show current version" If an update has been carried out before. se lect the desired version to display additional information.
Updating software via USB The software may only be updated when the vehicle is stationary.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. Store the file for the software update in the main directory of a USB storage de vice.
2. Connecting USB storage devices to the USB port.
"My MINI"
4. "System settings" 5. "Software update" 6. "Update software" 7. "USB" 8. "Install software" 9. "OK" 10. Wait for the update to complete.
11. Confirm system restart.
Restoring the software version You can restore the software to the version prior to the last update or to its factory set tings.
The software may only be restored when the vehicle is stationary.
Seite 58
AT A GLANCE General settings
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Owner's Manual media
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
You can use the following media formats to call up the content in the Owner's Manual: Printed Owner's Manual. refer to page 60.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi cle. refer to page 60.
Printed Owner's Manual
Concept The printed Owner's Manual describes all standard. country-specific. and optional fea tures offered with the series.
General information The Owner's Manual for Navigation. Enter tainment. and Communication can be ob tained as a printed book from the service center.
Supplementary Owner's Manuals Also follow the Supplementary Owner's Manuals. which are included in addition to the onboard literature.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Concept The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed on the Control Display.
Selecting the Owner's Manual
Press the button.
"My MINI"
3. "Owner's Manual" 4. Select the desired method of accessing the contents.
Scrolling through the Owner's Manual Turn the Controller. until the next or previ ous contents are displayed.
Context help
General information The section of the Owner's Manual relating to the function that is currently selected can be displayed directly.
Seite 60
AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Opening via Central Information Display (CID) Change directly to the Options menu from the function on the Control Display:
Press the button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual To switch from a function. for instance radio. to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to alternate between the two displays:
Press the button.
2. "Owner's Manual" 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Manual.
Press the button again to return to the last displayed function.
Press the button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate continuously between the last displayed function and the last displayed page of the Owner's Manual. repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information The Owner's Manual can be stored on the programmable memory buttons and called up directly.
Storing 1. Select the desired entry point via the Central Information Display (CID): "Quick reference"
"Search by pictures"
"Keyword search"
"Animations"
Press and hold the desired but ton. until a signal sounds.
Executing
Press the button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed immediately.
Seite 61
Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Vehicle key
General information The vehicle is supplied with two vehicle keys with integrated key.
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat tery. refer to page 65.
Depending on the equipment and country version. various settings. refer to page 74. can be configured for the button functions.
A personal driver profile. refer to page 71. for each vehicle key is stored in the vehicle.
To provide information on maintenance re quirements. the service data is stored in the vehicle key. refer to page 281.
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle key. take the vehicle key with you when ex iting the vehicle.
Safety information
Warning People or animals in the vehicle can lock the doors from the inside and lock them selves in. In this case. the vehicle cannot be opened from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be opened from the outside.
Warning Unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehicle while being exposed to extreme temperatures are at risk of injury or death.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.
Warning Unattended children or animals in the ve hicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic. for in stance due to the following actions: Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Releasing the parking brake.
Opening and closing the doors or windows.
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.
Seite 62
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Overview
Unlocking
Locking
Unlocking the tailgate
Panic mode
Unlocking
Press the button on the vehicle key.
Depending on the settings. refer to page 74. the following access points are unlocked. Driver's door and fuel filler flap.
Press the button on the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle access points.
All doors. tailgate. and fuel filler flap.
In addition. the following functions are exe cuted: Unlocking is confirmed by the turn sig nals and the horn. This function must be activated in the settings. refer to page 74.
The settings stored in the driver profile. refer to page 71. are applied.
The interior lights. refer to page 148. and the MINI logo projection are switched on. provided that the interior lights were not switched off manually.
Depending on the settings. the welcome light and pathway lighting. refer to page 145. are switched on.
Exterior mirrors folded through conven ient closing are folded open.
The alarm system. refer to page 75. is switched off.
The light functions may depend on the am bient brightness.
Convenient opening
Press and hold the button on the ve hicle key after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are opened. as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.
Locking 1. Close the driver's door.
Press the button on the vehicle key.
The following functions are executed: All doors. the tailgate. and the fuel filler flap are locked.
Locking is confirmed by the turn signals and the horn. This function must be ac tivated in the settings. refer to page 74.
The alarm system. refer to page 75. is switched on.
If the engine or ignition is still switched on when you lock the vehicle. the vehicle horn honks twice. In this case. the engine or ig nition must be switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.
Seite 63
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
With Comfort Access: convenient closing
Safety information
Warning With convenient closing. body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing.
Closing
Press and hold the button on the ve hicle key in the area close to the ve hicle.
The windows and the glass sunroof are closed. as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.
The exterior mirrors are folded in.
Switch on interior lights and courtesy light
Press the button on the vehicle key with the vehicle locked.
The MINI logo projection is also switched on.
These functions are not available if the inte rior lights were switched off manually.
The light functions may depend on the am bient brightness.
After locking. wait 10 seconds before press ing the button again.
Tailgate
General information To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi cle. do not place the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version. it is possible to specify whether the tailgate can be unlocked with the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. To perform settings. re fer to page 74.
Safety information
Warning Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tail gate is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of damage to prop erty. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driv ing. There is a risk of damage to property.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.
Opening
Press and hold the button on the ve hicle key for approx. 1 second.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.
Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.
Seite 64
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 sec onds.
Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Replacing the battery 1. Remove the integrated key from the ve hicle key. refer to page 67.
2. Slide the integrated key into the open ing and raise the cover.
The battery compartment is accessible.
3. Slide the integrated key in the cover of the battery compartment and raise the cover.
4. Push battery in the direction of the ar row using a pointed object and lift it out.
5. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the positive side facing up.
6. Insert lid and cover.
7. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key until it engages.
Have old batteries disposed of by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or take them to a collection point.
Additional vehicle keys Additional vehicle keys are available from a service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Loss of vehicle keys A lost vehicle key can be blocked and re placed by a dealer’s service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop.
Malfunction
General information A Check Control message is displayed.
Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circum stances:
Seite 65
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
The battery of the vehicle key is dis charged. For replacing the battery. refer to page 65.
Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power.
Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal objects.
Do not transport the vehicle key to gether with metal objects.
Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the vehi cle key.
Do not transport the vehicle key to gether with electronic devices.
Interference of radio transmission by a charging process of mobile devices. for instance charging of a mobile phone.
The vehicle key is in direct proximity of the wireless charging tray.
Place the vehicle key in a different loca tion.
In the case of interference. the vehicle can be unlocked and locked from the outside with the integrated key. refer to page 66.
Starting the engine via emergency detection of the Vehicle key
It is not possible to start the engine if the vehicle key has not been detected.
Proceed as follows in this case:
1. Hold the vehicle key against the mark on the steering column as shown. Pay attention to the display in the instru ment cluster.
2. If the vehicle key is detected: Start the engine within 10 seconds.
If the vehicle key is not recognized. slightly change the position of the vehicle key and repeat the procedure.
Frequently Asked Questions What precautions can be taken to be able to open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in vehicle key? The options provided by the Remote Services of the MINI Connected app in clude the ability to lock and unlock a ve hicle.
This requires an active MINI Connected contract and the MINI Connected app must be installed on a smartphone.
Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via the MINI Connected Call Center.
An active MINI Connected contract is required.
Integrated key
General information The driver's door can be locked and un locked without the vehicle key using the integrated key.
Safety information
Warning Unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge.
Seite 66
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehicle while being exposed to extreme temperatures are at risk of injury or death.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.
NOTICE The door lock is permanently joined with the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the integrated key inserted. paint or the integrated key can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Remove the integrated key before pulling the outside door handle.
Removing
Press the button. arrow 1. and pull out the integrated key. arrow 2.
Locking/unlocking via the door lock 1. Remove lid on the door lock.
To do this. slide the integrated key into the opening from below and remove the lid.
2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the integrated key.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked from the inside.
Alarm system The alarm system is not switched on if the vehicle is locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened. if the vehicle has been un locked via the door lock.
Buttons for the central locking system
General information In the event of a severe accident. the vehi cle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning system and interior lights come on.
Seite 67
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Overview
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
Press the button with the front doors closed.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking.
Unlocking
Press the button.
Opening
Press button to unlock the doors together. and then pull the door handle above the armrest.
Front doors: pull the door handle on the door to open the door. The other doors remain locked.
Back doors: pull twice on the door han dle on the door to be opened; the first time unlocks the door. the second time opens it. The other doors remain locked.
Comfort Access
Concept The vehicle can be accessed without operat ing the vehicle key.
Carrying the vehicle key with you. e.g. in your pants pocket. is sufficient.
The vehicle automatically detects the vehi cle key when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior.
General information Comfort Access supports the following functions: Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
Convenient closing.
Open the tailgate.
Functional requirements To lock the vehicle. the vehicle key must be outside of the vehicle near the doors.
The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 sec onds.
Unlocking
On the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle. press the button.
Depending on the settings. refer to page 74. only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap may be unlocked. Unlike when unlocking using the vehicle key.
Seite 68
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Locking
On the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle. press the button.
Convenient closing
Safety information
Warning With convenient closing. body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing.
Closing
Press and hold down the button on the driv er's or front passenger's outer door handle.
In addition to locking. the windows and glass sunroof will be closed.
The exterior mirrors are folded in.
To open the tailgate
General information If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access. locked doors are not unlocked.
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi cle. do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
Safety information
Warning Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tail gate is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of damage to prop erty. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.
Seite 69
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
NOTICE Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driv ing. There is a risk of damage to property.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.
Opening
Press button next on tailgate.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.
Malfunction Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circum stances: The battery of the vehicle key is dis charged. For replacing the battery. refer to page 65.
Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power.
Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal objects.
Do not transport the vehicle key to gether with metal objects.
Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the vehi cle key.
Do not transport the vehicle key to gether with electronic devices.
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking request recognition function on the door handles.
In the case of a malfunction. unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the ve hicle key or use the integrated key. refer to page 66.
Tailgate
General information To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi cle. do not place the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version. it is possible to specify whether the tailgate can be unlocked with the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. To perform settings. re fer to page 74.
Safety information
Warning Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tail gate is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. There is a risk of damage to prop erty. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.
Seite 70
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
NOTICE Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driv ing. There is a risk of damage to property.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.
Opening and closing
Opening from the outside
Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi cle or have the vehicle key with you.
Press button next on tailgate.
Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting. the doors may also be unlocked. Unlocking with the ve hicle key. refer to page 64.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung upward.
Opening from the inside
With Steptronic transmission: With the vehicle stationary. press the button in the driver's floor area.
If the vehicle is locked. selector lever posi tion P must be engaged first.
With manual transmission:
With the vehicle stationary. press the but ton in the driver's floor area twice in quick succession.
Closing
Recessed grips on the interior trim of the tailgate can be used to conveniently pull down the tailgate.
Driver profiles
Concept In the driver profiles. individual settings for several drivers can be stored and called up again when required.
General information There are three driver profiles with which personal vehicle settings can be stored. Ev ery vehicle key has been assigned one of these driver profiles.
If the vehicle is unlocked using the vehicle key. the assigned personal driver profile will be activated. All settings stored in the driver profile are automatically applied.
If several drivers use their own vehicle keys. the vehicle will apply the personal set tings as it is being unlocked. These settings are also restored. if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by a person with a different vehicle key.
Seite 71
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Changes to the settings are automatically stored in the driver profile currently acti vated.
If another driver profile is selected via the Central Information Display (CID). the set tings stored in it will be applied automati cally. The new driver profile is assigned to the vehicle key that is currently in use.
There is an additional guest profile available that is not assigned to any vehicle key: it can be used to apply settings in the vehicle without changing the personal driver pro files.
Functional requirements For the system to be able to identify the driver profile associated to a particular driver. the detected vehicle key must be clearly allocated to the driver.
This is the case when: The driver is only carrying his or her own vehicle key.
The driver unlocks the vehicle.
The driver gets into the vehicle through the driver's door.
Adjusting The settings for the following systems and functions are stored in the active profile.
The scope of storable settings depends on country and equipment. Unlocking and locking.
Lights.
Radio.
Instrument cluster.
Programmable memory buttons.
Volumes. tone.
Control Display.
Climate control.
Navigation.
PDC Park Distance Control.
Rearview camera.
Head-up Display.
MINI Driving Modes.
Intelligent Safety.
Profile management
Selecting a driver profile Regardless of the vehicle key in use. a dif ferent driver profile may be activated. This allows you to call up personal vehicle set tings. even if you did not unlock the vehicle with your own vehicle key.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles" 3. Select driver profile.
4. "OK" All settings stored in the selected driver profile are automatically applied.
The called-up driver profile is assigned to the vehicle key being used at the time.
If the driver profile is already assigned to a different vehicle key. this driver profile will apply to both vehicle keys.
Using a guest profile The guest profile is for individual settings that are stored in none of the three personal driver profiles.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles" 3. "Drive off (guest)" 4. "OK" The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is assigned to the vehicle key that is not used at the time.
Seite 72
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Renaming a driver profile A personal name can be assigned to the ac tive driver profile to avoid confusion be tween the driver profiles.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles" 3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this symbol can be renamed.
4. "Change driver profile name" 5. Enter profile name.
Select the symbol.
Resetting a driver profile The settings of the driver profile currently in use are reset to their factory settings.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles" 3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this symbol can be reset.
4. "Reset driver profile" 5. "OK"
Exporting driver profiles Most settings of the active driver profile can be exported.
Exporting is helpful when storing and re trieving personal settings. for instance be fore delivering the vehicle to a workshop.
The stored driver profiles can be taken into another vehicle.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles" 3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this symbol can be exported.
4. "Export driver profile (USB)" Select USB storage device as needed.
Importing driver profiles Profiles stored on a USB storage device can be imported via the USB port.
The existing settings of the active driver profile are overwritten with the settings of the imported driver profile.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles" 3. Select the driver profile to overwrite.
The driver profile marked with this symbol can be overwritten.
4. "Import driver profile (USB)" Select USB storage device as needed.
5. Select the driver profile to be imported.
Displaying driver profiles during start The driver profiles can be displayed at each startup to select the desired profile.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles" 3. "Show driver profiles at startup"
System limits A clear assignment between the vehicle key and driver may not be possible in the fol lowing cases. for example. The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his or her own vehicle key. but another person is driving.
The driver unlocks the vehicle via Com fort Access and has multiple vehicle keys with him or her.
Seite 73
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
The driver changes. but the vehicle is not locked and unlocked.
Multiple vehicle keys are located out side of the vehicle.
Adjusting
General information Depending on the package and country ver sion. various settings are available for the vehicle key functions.
These settings are stored for the driver pro file. refer to page 71. currently used.
Unlocking
Doors Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Doors/Key" 4. "Driver's door" or "All doors" 5. Select the desired setting:
"Driver's door only" Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks the entire vehicle.
"All doors" The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Tailgate Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Doors/Key"
The text next to the symbol indicates the current setting.
5. Select the desired setting:
"Tailgate" Only the tailgate is unlocked.
"Tailgate and door(s)" The tailgate and the doors are un locked.
"Tailgate opens after unlocking" The vehicle must be unlocked before the tailgate can be used with the ve hicle key.
"Button lock" It is not possible to use the tailgate via the vehicle key.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version. this setting may not be of fered.
Automatic locking Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Doors/Key" 4. Select the desired setting:
"Lock automatically" The vehicle locks automatically after a while if no door is opened after un locking.
"Lock after starting to drive" The vehicle locks automatically after you drive off.
Automatic unlocking Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
Seite 74
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
3. "Doors/Key" 4. "Unlock at end of trip" After the engine is switched off by pressing the Start/Stop button. the locked vehicle is automatically un locked.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle Via the Central Information Display (CID):
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Doors/Key" 4. Deactivate or activate the desired con firmation signals. "Flash for lock/unlock" Unlocking is signaled by two flashes. locking by one.
With alarm system: "Acoustic signal for lock/unlock" Unlocking is signaled by one honk of the horn.
Alarm system
General information When the vehicle is locked. the vehicle alarm system reacts to the following changes: Unauthorized opening of a door. the hood or the tailgate.
Movements in the car's interior.
Changes in the vehicle tilt. for instance. during attempts at stealing a wheel or when towing the vehicle.
Disconnected battery voltage.
Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.
Locking the vehicle while a device is connected to the socket for the OBD On board-Diagnosis. For socket for the OBD Onboard Diagnosis. refer to page 282.
The alarm system signals these changes vis ually and acoustically: Acoustic alarm: Depending on local regulations. the acoustic alarm may be suppressed.
Visual alarm: By flashing of the hazard warning sys tem and headlights. where required.
Do not modify the system to ensure func tion of the alarm system.
Overview
Indicator light on the interior mirror.
Switching on/off The alarm system is switched on or off as soon as the vehicle is locked with the vehi cle key or unlocked or locked via Comfort Access.
Opening the doors with the alarm system switched on The alarm system is triggered when a door is opened if the door was unlocked using the integrated key in the door lock.
Switching off the alarm. refer to page 77.
Seite 75
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Opening the tailgate with the alarm system switched on The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm system is switched on.
After the tailgate is closed. it is locked and monitored again provided the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once.
Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 sec onds.
Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Signals of the indicator light The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 seconds: The alarm system is switched on.
Indicator light flashes for approx.
10 seconds. then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds: Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active. as doors. hood. or tailgate are not correctly closed. Cor rectly closed access points are secured.
When the still open access points are closed. the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will be switched on.
The indicator light goes out after un locking: The vehicle has not been tampered with.
The indicator light flashes after unlock ing until the engine ignition is switched on. but no longer than approx. 5 mi nutes: An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is towed.
Interior motion sensor The windows and the glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can trigger an alarm. although no un authorized action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm: In automatic vehicle washes.
In duplex garages.
During transport on trains carrying ve hicles. at sea or on a trailer.
With animals in the vehicle.
When the vehicle is locked after start of fueling.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior mo tion sensor can be switched off in such sit uations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
Press the button on the vehicle key within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked.
The indicator light lights up for approx.
2 seconds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
Seite 76
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Switching off the alarm Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.
Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key and switch on the ignition using the emergency detection of the vehicle key. refer to page 65.
With Comfort Access: if you have the vehicle key with you. unlock the vehicle using the button on the driver's side or passenger side door.
Power windows
General information If an accident of a certain severity occurs. the windows are automatically closed ex cept a gap.
Safety information
Warning When operating the windows. body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing.
Overview
On 3-door models
Power windows
On 5-door models
Power windows
Safety switch
Opening
Press the switch to the resistance point.
The window opens while the switch is being held.
Press the switch beyond the resist ance point.
The window opens automatically. Press ing the switch again stops the motion.
Convenient opening with the vehicle key. refer to page 63.
Closing
Pull the switch to the resistance point.
The window closes while the switch is being held.
Pull the switch beyond the resist ance point.
Seite 77
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
The window closes automatically if the door is closed. Pulling the switch again stops the motion.
Convenient closing with the vehicle key. re fer to page 64.
Closing via Comfort Access. refer to page 69.
Jam protection system
Concept The jam protection prevents objects or body parts becoming jammed between the door frame and window while a window is being closed.
General information If resistance or a blockage is detected while a window is being closed. the closing action is interrupted.
The window opens slightly.
Safety information
Warning Accessories on the windows such as an tennas can impact jam protection. There is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the area of movement of the windows.
Closing without the jam protection system In case of danger from the outside or if ice might prevent normal closing. proceed as follows:
Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there.
The window closes with limited jam pro tection. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold. closing is inter rupted.
Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.
The window closes without jam protec tion.
On 5-door models: safety switch
General information The safety switch can be used to prevent children. for instance from opening and closing the rear windows using the switches in the rear.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs. the safety function is switched off automati cally.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED lights up if the safety func tion is switched on.
Malfunction
General information In certain situations a window can only be operated to a limited extent. After a power failure during the opening or closing process. the a window can only be operated to a limited extent. The system must be initialized in this case.
The power window motors are equipped with overheating protection. If a win dow is opened and closed several times within a short period of time. the over heating protection switches the motor off temporarily. Depending on the de gree of overheating. it may only be pos sible to close the window or it may not be possible to operate it at all.
In this case: allow the power window motor to cool down.
Seite 78
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Initializing the system The system can be initialized when the ve hicle is stationary and the engine is run ning.
During initialization. the affected window closes without jam protection.
Warning When operating the windows. body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing.
1. Open the affected window completely.
Pull the switch to the resistance point and hold.
The window closes.
Continue holding the switch pulled to the resistance point.
The window opens and closes once or twice after approx. 15 seconds. depend ing on the vehicle's equipment.
4. Release switch.
Panoramic glass sunroof
General information In the event of a severe accident. the glass sunroof is automatically closed.
Safety information
Warning Body parts can be jammed when operating the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the glass sunroof is clear during opening and closing.
Overview
Tilting the glass sunroof
Press back the switch up to or beyond the resistance point and release it.
The glass sunroof is raised.
Opening glass sunroof
When the glass sunroof is closed
Press the switch back beyond the resistance point and re lease it twice.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Seite 79
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
With the glass sunroof completely raised
Slide switch back to the re sistance point and hold.
The glass sunroof is opened as long as the switch is pressed.
Press the switch back beyond the resist ance point and release it.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Pressing the switch again stops the mo tion.
Comfort position In some models. the wind noises in the car's interior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not fully open. In these models. the auto matic function initially only opens the glass sunroof up to this comfort position.
Pressing the switch again opens the glass sunroof fully.
Closing glass sunroof
With the glass sunroof open
Slide switch forward to the resistance point and hold.
The glass sunroof is closed as long as the switch is pressed and stops in the raised position.
Press the switch forward beyond the re sistance point and release it.
The glass sunroof is closed and stops in the raised position.
Pressing the switch again stops the mo tion.
Press the switch forward beyond the re sistance point and release it twice.
The glass sunroof is closed.
Pressing the switch again stops the mo tion.
With the glass sunroof completely raised
Press the switch forward be yond the resistance point and release it.
The glass sunroof is closed.
Jam protection system
Concept The jam protection prevents objects or body parts from becoming jammed between the roof and glass sunroof while the glass sun roof is closing.
General information If resistance or a blockage is detected while the glass sunroof is being closed. the clos ing action is interrupted.
The glass sunroof opens slightly.
Closing without the jam protection system If there is an external danger. proceed as follows:
1. Push the switch forward past the resist ance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes with limited jam protection. If the closing force ex ceeds a specific threshold. closing is in terrupted.
2. Push the switch forward again past the resistance point and hold until the glass
Seite 80
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Initializing after a power interruption After a power failure during the opening or closing process. the glass sunroof can only be operated to a limited extent. The system must be initialized in this case. MINI rec ommends having this work performed only by a dealer's service center or another quali fied service center or repair shop.
Seite 81
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Seats. mirrors. and steering wheel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Sitting safely
An ideal seating position that meets the needs of the occupants can make a vital contribution to relaxed. fatigue-free driving.
In the event of an accident. the correct seat ing position plays an important role. Follow the information in the following chapters: Seats. refer to page 82.
Safety belts. refer to page 84.
Head restraints. refer to page 86.
Airbags. refer to page 150.
Front seats
Safety information
Warning Seat adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehi cle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Only adjust the seat on the driv er's side when the vehicle is stationary.
Warning With a backrest inclined too far to the rear. the efficacy of the safety belt can no longer be ensured. There is a risk of slid ing under the safety belt in an accident.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip.
Adjust the backrest so that it is in the most upright position as possible and do not adjust again while driving.
Warning There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.
Adjusting seats
Overview
Forward/backward
Thigh support
Height
Backrest tilt
Seite 82
CONTROLS Seats. mirrors. and steering wheel
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Forward/backward
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the de sired direction.
After releasing the lever. move the seat for ward or back slightly making sure it en gages properly.
Height
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as needed to reach the desired height.
Backrest tilt
Pull the lever. and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off. as necessary.
Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be adjusted in a way that it supports the lum bar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.
Turn the wheel in order to increase or de crease the curvature.
Thigh support
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and ad just the thigh support.
In 3-door models: entering the rear
Safety information
Warning There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.
Seite 83
Seats. mirrors. and steering wheel CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Warning Unexpected movements of the rear seat backrest while driving may occur if the rear seat backrest is unlocked. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of in jury. Fold back and lock the rear seat back rests before driving.
Fold the seat backrest forward 1. Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold the seat backrest forward.
3. Push the seat forward.
Original position The driver's seat features a mechanical memory function for forward/back and backrest adjustment.
1. Push the seat back into the original po sition.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
If the backrest is folded back when the seat is not yet in the original position. the seat engages in the current position. In this case. manually adjust longitudinal direction. refer to page 83.
Front seat heating
Overview
Seat heating
Switching on
Press the button once for each tem perature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx.
15 minutes after a stop. seat heating is acti vated automatically with the temperature selected last.
When GREEN Mode is activated. refer to page 237. the heating output is reduced.
Switching off
Press and hold the button until the LEDs go out.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts and safety belt buckles The vehicle is fitted with four or five safety belts to ensure occupants' safety. However. they can only offer protection when ad justed correctly.
Seite 84
CONTROLS Seats. mirrors. and steering wheel
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear seat are intended for the persons sitting on the left and right.
The center safety belt buckle of the rear seat is intended for the person sitting in the middle.
General information Always make sure that safety belts are be ing worn by all occupants before driving off.
Although airbags enhance safety by provid ing added protection. they are not a substi tute for safety belts.
If needed. disengage the safety belt in the rear from the belt buckle on the side.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information
Warning Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one person will potentially defeat the abil ity of the safety belt to serve its protective function. There is a risk of injuries or dan ger to life. Do not allow more than one per son to wear a single safety belt. Infants and children are not allowed on an occu pant's lap. but must be transported and se cured in designated child restraint sys tems.
Warning The efficacy of safety gear. including safety belts. can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries. for instance in the event of an accident. braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
Warning With a rear backrest that is not locked. the protective function of the middle safety belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. If you are using the middle safety belt. lock the wider rear seat backrest.
Warning The efficacy of safety gear. including safety belts. may not be fully functional or fail in the following situations: The safety belts or safety belt buckles are damaged. soiled. or changed in any other way.
Belt tensioners or belt retractors were modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts. safety belt buckles. belt ten sioners. belt retractors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have the safety belts checked after an accident at the dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Correct use of safety belts Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to your body over your lap and should ers.
Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over your lap. The safety belt may not press on your stomach.
Do not rub the safety belt against sharp edges. or guide it or jam it in across hard or fragile objects.
Seite 85
Seats. mirrors. and steering wheel CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Avoid thick clothing.
Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up ward around your upper body.
Buckling the safety belt 1. Guide the safety belt slowly over shoulder and hip to put it on.
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage audibly.
Unbuckling the safety belt 1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll up mechanism.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat
Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light lights up and a signal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly.
The safety belt reminder can also be acti vated if objects are placed on the front pas senger seat.
Front head restraints
Safety information
Warning A missing protective effect due to re moved or not correctly adjusted head re straints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. Before driving. install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats.
Adjust the head restraint so its center supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible.
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.
Warning Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.
Warning Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. Do not use seat or head restraint cov ers.
Do not hang objects. for instance clothes hangers. directly on the head restraint.
Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.
Do not use any accessories. for in stance pillows. while driving.
Seite 86
CONTROLS Seats. mirrors. and steering wheel
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Adjusting the height: John Cooper Works sport seat The height of the head restraints cannot be set.
Adjusting the height
To lower: press the button. arrow 1. and push the head restraint down.
To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height. make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.
Removing: John Cooper Works sport seat The head restraints cannot be removed.
Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.
1. If necessary. fold the rear seat backrest forward.
2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.
3. Press the button. arrow 1. and pull the head restraint out completely.
Installing Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.
Rear head restraints
Safety information
Warning A missing protective effect due to re moved or not correctly adjusted head re straints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. Before driving. install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats.
Adjust the head restraint so its center supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible.
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.
Warning Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.
Warning Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. Do not use seat or head restraint cov ers.
Seite 87
Seats. mirrors. and steering wheel CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Do not hang objects. for instance clothes hangers. directly on the head restraint.
Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.
Do not use any accessories. for in stance pillows. while driving.
Adjusting the height
To lower: press the button. arrow 1. and push the head restraint down.
To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height. make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.
Fold down
To fold down: press the button. arrow 1. and press down the head restraint. ar row 2.
Forward: fold the head restraint toward the front as far as it will go. Make sure
Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest. refer to page 226. in question.
2. Pull head restraint up against the resist ance.
3. Press the button. arrow 1. and pull the head restraint out completely.
Installing Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information The mirror on the front passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror.
Seite 88
CONTROLS Seats. mirrors. and steering wheel
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Safety information
Warning Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. The distance to the traf fic behind could be incorrectly estimated. for instance while changing lanes. There is a risk of accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind by looking over your shoulder.
Overview
Adjusting
Selecting a mirror. Automatic Curb Mon itor
Folding in and out
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror: Slide the switch.
Adjusting electrically
Press the button.
The mirror movement follows the button movement.
Malfunction In case of an electrical malfunction. adjust the mirror by pressing the edges of the mir ror glass.
Folding in and out
NOTICE Depending on the vehicle width. the vehi cle can be damaged in vehicle washes.
There is a risk of damage to property. Be fore washing. fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.
Press the button.
Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the following situations: In vehicle washes.
On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out automatically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as needed and when the ignition is switched on.
Automatic dimming feature The exterior mirror on the driver's side is automatically dimmed. Photocells in the car's interior mirror. refer to page 90. are used to control this.
Automatic Curb Monitor. exterior mirror
Concept If reverse gear is engaged. the mirror glass on the front passenger side is tilted down ward. This improves your view of the curb and other formatting issue - low-lying ob stacles when parking. for instance.
Seite 89
Seats. mirrors. and steering wheel CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Activating
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating Slide the switch to the passenger's side mir ror position.
Interior mirror. manually dimmable
Flip lever
To reduce the blinding effect of the interior mirror. flip the lever forward.
Turn knob
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by the interior mirror.
Interior mirror. automatic dimming feature
Overview
Photocells are used for control: In the mirror glass.
On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirements Keep the photocells clean.
Do not cover the area between the inte rior mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
Warning Steering wheel adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected steering wheel movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of accident. Adjustng the steering wheel while the vehicle is sta tionary only.
Seite 90
CONTROLS Seats. mirrors. and steering wheel
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Adjusting
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer red height and angle to suit your seating position.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Seite 91
Seats. mirrors. and steering wheel CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
The right place for children
Safety information
Warning Unattended children or animals in the ve hicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic. for in stance due to the following actions: Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Releasing the parking brake.
Opening and closing the doors or windows.
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.
Warning A heated vehicle may result in death to persons. especially children. or animals.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Do not leave persons. especially children. or animals unattended in the vehicle.
Warning Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child restraint systems and their compo nents to become very hot. Persons may sustain burn injuries when touching the hot components. There is a risk of injury.
Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight or cover where necessary.
If necessary. let the child restraint system cool down before transporting a child. Do not leave children unattended in the vehi cle.
Always transport children in the rear seat
General information Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the rear seat.
Transport children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear seat in suitable child restraint systems designed for the age. weight and size of the child. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age. weight. or size.
Seite 92
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Safety information
Warning The safety belt cannot be fastened cor rectly on children shorter than 5 ft.
150 cm without suitable additional child restraint systems. The efficacy of safety gear. including safety belts. can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened in correctly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries. for in stance in the event of an accident. braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in juries or danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft. 150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.
Children on the front passenger seat
General information Before using a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. ensure that the front. knee. and side airbags on the front passen ger side are deactivated. For automatic de activation of front-seat passenger airbags. refer to page 152.
Safety information
Warning Active front-seat passenger airbags can in jure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front seat passenger airbags are deactivated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica tor light lights up.
Warning The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child re straint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible. adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible. adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.
Installing child restraint sys tems
General information Pay attention to the specifications of the child restraint system manufacturer when selecting. installing. and using child re straint systems.
In order to facilitate the installation of a back-facing child restraint system in the rear: Move the front passenger seat as far up as possible before folding down the backrest.
Safety information
Warning The protective effect of child restraint sys tems and their fastening systems which have been damaged or exposed to an acci dent can be limited or lost. A child cannot be properly restrained in the event of an accident. braking or evasive maneuvers.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Seite 93
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Do not use child restraint systems which have been damaged or exposed to an acci dent.
If a child restraint system and its fasten ing system has been damaged or exposed to an accident. have these systems checked and replaced by the dealer's serv ice center or another qualified service cen ter or repair shop.
Warning The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child re straint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible. adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible. adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.
On the rear seats In order to facilitate the installation of a back-facing child restraint system: Move the front passenger seat as far up as possible before folding down the backrest.
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
Warning Active front-seat passenger airbags can in jure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front seat passenger airbags are deactivated and
Before installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat. make sure that the front. knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags automatically. refer to page 152.
Seat position and height Before installing a child restraint system. move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest and thus best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is located in front of the belt guide of the child seat. move the front passenger seat care fully forward until the best possible belt guide position is reached.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passen ger safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten child restraint systems.
John Cooper Works GP:
Seite 94
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
The front passenger safety belt can be per manently locked to fasten child restraint systems.
Locking the safety belt 1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it tight against the child restraint system. The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt 1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing system
General information LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil dren.
Pay attention to the operating and safety in formation from the child restraint system manufacturer when installing and using LATCH child restraint fixing systems.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a com bined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Safety information
Warning If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys tems are not correctly engaged. the protec tive effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing system can be limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are securely en gaged and that the LATCH child restraint fixing system fits securely against the backrest.
Position
Symbol Meaning
The corresponding symbol shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower anchors are marked with a pair. (2). of LATCH symbols.
For vehicles equipped with a middle seat: It is not recommended to use the inner lower anchors of standard outer LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint system on the middle seat. Use the vehicle safety belt instead for the middle seat.
Seite 95
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Before installing LATCH child restraint fixing systems Pull the safety belt away from the area of the child restraint system.
Assembly of LATCH child restraint fixing systems 1. Install child restraint system. see manu facturer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are properly engaged.
Child restraint systems with tether strap
Safety information
Warning If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used for the child restraint system. the protective effect can be reduced. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes the upper anchor.
Warning If the rear backrest is not locked. the pro tective effect of the child restraint system is limited or there is none. In certain situa tions. for instance braking maneuvers or in case of an accident. the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the rear backrests are locked.
NOTICE The anchors for the upper retaining straps of child restraint systems are only pro vided for these retaining straps. When other objects are mounted. the anchors can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only mount child restraint systems to the upper anchors.
Anchors
The respective symbol shows the an chor for the upper retaining strap.
Seats with an upper top tether are marked with this symbol. It can be found on the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
John Cooper Works GP:
The anchor for the upper retaining strap is marked with a top tether symbol. It is located in the cargo area on the passenger's side below the tail gate.
Routing the retaining strap
Direction of travel
Head restraint
Hook for upper retaining strap
Anchor
Seat backrest
Upper retaining strap
Seite 96
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Attaching the upper retaining strap to the anchor 1. Raise the head restraint. if needed.
2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retain ing strap between or along both sides of the supports of the head restraint to the anchor.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the anchor on the rear seat.
4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.
John Cooper Works GP: guiding the retaining strap
Direction of travel
Head restraint
Hook for upper retaining strap
Anchor
Cargo floor panel
Seat backrest
Upper retaining strap
John Cooper Works GP: attaching the upper retaining strap to the anchor 1. Guide the upper retaining strap cen tered over the head restraint.
2. Attach the upper retaining strap with the hook at the anchor in the trunk.
3. Pull the retaining strap taut.
ON 5-door models: Locking the doors and windows
Doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
The door can now be opened from the out side only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press the button on the driver's door if children are being trans ported in the rear.
This locks various functions so that they cannot be operated from the rear: safety switch. refer to page 78.
Seite 97
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
Driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard. country specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle. e.g. due to the selected op tions or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems. the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
Start/Stop button
Concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine.
Steptronic transmission: the engine starts in selector lever position P or N with the brake pedal pressed when you press the Start/Stop button.
Manual transmission: the engine starts with the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/ Stop button is pressed.
Ignition on Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop button without stepping on the clutch pedal.
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/ Stop button. but do not press on the brake pedal at the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster light up for a varied length of time.
To save battery power when the engine is off. switch off the ignition and any unneces sary electronic systems/power consumers.
Ignition off Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop button again without stepping on the clutch pedal.
Steptronic transmission: shift to selector lever position P. press the Start/Stop button again without stepping on the brake.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go out.
To save battery power when the engine is off. switch off the ignition and any unneces sary electronic systems/power consumers.
Safety measures The ignition is switched off automatically in the following situations while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is off: When locking the vehicle. even if the low beams are switched on.
Shortly before the battery is discharged completely. so that the engine can still be started. This function is only availa ble when the low beams are switched off.
When opening or closing the driver door. if the driver's safety belt is un buckled and the low beams are switched off.
While the driver's safety belt is unbuck led with driver's door open and low beams off.
When the front doors are opened if there is no other person sitting in the front seats.
Seite 98
CONTROLS Driving
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
The low beams switch to parking lights after some minutes of no use.
Steptronic transmission with a tap-operated selector lever. refer to page 114: when switching off the ignition. the selector lever position P is engaged automatically if the selector lever position R. D or M/S is en gaged.
Radio-ready state
General information In the radio-ready state. certain power con sumers remain ready for operation.
Activating With the engine running. press the Start/ Stop button.
If the engine is not running and the ignition is switched on: the system automatically ac tivates radio-ready state when the door is opened if the lights are switched off or the daytime running lights are switched on.
Radio-ready state remains active if. for in stance the ignition is automatically switched off for the following reasons: Opening or closing the driver's door.
Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
When automatically switching from low beams to parking lights.
Switching off automatically The radio-ready state is switched off auto matically in the following situations: If the driver's or front passenger door is opened when exiting the vehicle. with the engine switched off manually.
If the ignition is switched off manually with the Start/Stop button.
After approx. 8 minutes.
When the vehicle is locked using the central locking system.
Shortly before the battery is discharged completely. so that the engine can still be started.
Starting the engine
Safety information
DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila tion is insufficient. harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollutants which are color less and odorless. In enclosed areas. ex haust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.
Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting. secure the vehi cle against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se cured against rolling away. follow the fol lowing: Set the parking brake.
On uphill grades or on a downhill slope. turn the front wheels in the di rection of the curb.
On uphill grades or on a downhill slope. also secure the vehicle. for in stance with a wheel chock.
NOTICE In the case of repeated starting attempts or repeated starting in quick succession. the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned. The catalytic converter can over
Seite 99
Driving CONTROLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A1E4E3 - II/20
